Mpr mss 1 c_user_manual (Alcatel Lucent)

alAAe 1010

User Manu

Indoor: MSS-1c + Outdoor: MPT-HC/MPT-MC

9500 MPR-E

3DB 18782 AAIssu

Rel. 2.2.0

October 2

Status: RELEASED

All rights reserved.Passing on and copying of this document,

use and communication of its contents is not permittedwithout written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent.

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2010 Alcatel-Lucent

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES ......................................................................................................................... 5

LIST OF TABLES ........................................................................................................................... 9

PREFACE......................................................................................................................................... 11Preliminary Information.............................................................................................................. 11Applicability................................................................................................................................. 12Scope ........................................................................................................................................... 12History.......................................................................................................................................... 12Change notes .............................................................................................................................. 13Handbook Structure ................................................................................................................... 13General on Alcatel-Lucent Customer Documentation ............................................................ 14

1 SAFETY, EMC, EMF, ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING ........................................ 191.1 Declaration of conformity to CE marking and Countries List ......................................... 201.2 Specific label for MPR equipment ...................................................................................... 211.3 Applicable standards and recommendations ................................................................... 211.4 Safety Rules ......................................................................................................................... 22

1.4.1 General Rules................................................................................................................. 221.4.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command........................................................ 23

1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms).................................................................... 261.6 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges .................................................. 271.7 Cautions to avoid equipment damage ............................................................................... 28

2 PRODUCT INFORMATION AND PLANNING ............................................................................. 292.1 9500 Family overview .......................................................................................................... 31

2.1.1 9500 MPR System Family .............................................................................................. 352.1.2 Family elements described in this User Manual ............................................................. 362.1.3 MSS-1c ........................................................................................................................... 362.1.4 MPT-HC .......................................................................................................................... 372.1.5 MPT-MC.......................................................................................................................... 372.1.6 MSS-1c to MPT-HC interconnection ............................................................................... 382.1.7 MSS-1c to MPT-MC interconnection............................................................................... 402.1.8 Antennas......................................................................................................................... 40

2.2 Radio capacity, channelling and modulation (MPT-HC/MPT-MC).................................... 412.3 Standard Features ............................................................................................................... 442.4 Radio Configurations .......................................................................................................... 442.5 Typical System Configurations .......................................................................................... 452.6 Environmental and Electrical Characteristics................................................................... 46

2.6.1 General characteristics (MSS-1c) ................................................................................... 462.6.2 General characteristics (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)................................................................... 472.6.3 MPT-MC characteristics.................................................................................................. 482.6.4 MPT-HC characteristics .................................................................................................. 492.6.5 Radio performances ....................................................................................................... 492.6.6 General characteristics (Power Extractor) ...................................................................... 50

2.7 Parts Lists............................................................................................................................. 512.7.1 MSS-1c ........................................................................................................................... 512.7.2 MPT-HC optical interface option ..................................................................................... 512.7.3 MPT-HC with internal diplexer ........................................................................................ 522.7.4 MPT-MC with internal diplexer ........................................................................................ 542.7.5 MPT-HC/MPT-MC with external diplexer (7/8 GHz)........................................................ 56

2.8 Functional description ........................................................................................................ 592.8.1 MSS-1c (Indoor Unit) ...................................................................................................... 59

User Manual

Table of Contents

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 1/308

2.8.2 Fan unit ........................................................................................................................... 632.8.3 MPT-HC .......................................................................................................................... 642.8.4 Power Extractor .............................................................................................................. 732.8.5 MPT-MC.......................................................................................................................... 742.8.6 Radio Transmission Features with MPT-HC/MPT-MC.................................................... 752.8.7 TMN communication channels ....................................................................................... 782.8.8 Traffic profiles ................................................................................................................. 792.8.9 Ethernet Traffic Management ......................................................................................... 842.8.10 Quality Of Services (QoS) ............................................................................................ 852.8.11 Cross-connections ........................................................................................................ 892.8.12 Synchronization ............................................................................................................ 91

3 NE MANAGEMENT BY SOFTWARE APPLICATION................................................................. 953.1 WebEML start ....................................................................................................................... 953.2 Tool bar ................................................................................................................................. 973.3 Alarm Synthesis................................................................................................................... 983.4 Domain Alarm Synthesis Area............................................................................................ 983.5 General Information on the Management State ................................................................ 993.6 Navigator area...................................................................................................................... 100

3.6.1 Commissioning ............................................................................................................... 1013.6.2 Performance Monitoring ................................................................................................. 1173.6.3 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 1263.6.4 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 1283.6.5 Monitoring ....................................................................................................................... 1293.6.6 Provisioning Tool............................................................................................................. 135

4 INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................ 1494.1 Installation & Interconnection overview ............................................................................ 1494.2 Hardware Installation........................................................................................................... 151

4.2.1 Power consumption ........................................................................................................ 1514.2.2 Rack Installation ............................................................................................................. 1524.2.3 MSS-1c installation ......................................................................................................... 1624.2.4 MPT-HC Installation ........................................................................................................ 1684.2.5 MPT-MC Installation........................................................................................................ 2084.2.6 Power Extractor .............................................................................................................. 2284.2.7 Indoor Installation ........................................................................................................... 2294.2.8 Antenna Alignment ......................................................................................................... 237

4.3 Software local copy ............................................................................................................. 2464.3.1 Getting Started................................................................................................................ 2474.3.2 PC Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 2474.3.3 Local copy of the Software Package (SWP) to the PC................................................... 2484.3.4 Local copy the WebEML to PC....................................................................................... 2504.3.5 Configure PC Network Card to Connect to NE............................................................... 256

5 PROVISIONING............................................................................................................................ 259

6 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE-CLEARING ............................................................................ 2636.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 2636.2 Maintenance Philosophy..................................................................................................... 2646.3 Personal Computer (PC)/Laptop ........................................................................................ 2646.4 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................... 264

6.4.1 Before Going to Site Checklist ........................................................................................ 2646.4.2 PC Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 2656.4.3 Troubleshooting Basics................................................................................................... 2656.4.4 Troubleshooting with MSS-1c electrical or optical connection........................................ 271

User Manual

Table of Contents

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 12/308

6.4.5 Troubleshooting Path Problems...................................................................................... 2716.4.6 Troubleshooting Configuration Problems........................................................................ 2736.4.7 Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems ............................................................................... 2736.4.8 Troubleshooting TMN Problems ..................................................................................... 274

6.5 Failed equipment removal and replacement ..................................................................... 2766.5.1 MSS-1c removal and replacement ................................................................................. 2766.5.2 MPT-HC removal and replacement................................................................................. 2766.5.3 MPT-MC removal and replacement ................................................................................ 276

6.6 Cleaning................................................................................................................................ 277

7 LINE–UP AND COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................... 2797.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 280

7.1.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 2807.1.2 Safety–EMC–EMF–ESD norms and cautions to avoid equipment damage................... 2817.1.3 Conventions.................................................................................................................... 2817.1.4 Summary of the line–up, commissioning, and acceptance phases ................................ 2827.1.5 How to access the remote NE ........................................................................................ 283

7.2 Commissioning of STATION A – phase 1 (Turn up).......................................................... 2847.2.1 Turn–on preliminary operations ...................................................................................... 2847.2.2 Powering up the MSS-1c(s) with ODU(s) connected...................................................... 285

7.3 Commissioning of STATION B – phase 1 (Turn up).......................................................... 2857.4 Fine antenna alignment and preliminary checks – Stations A & B................................. 285

7.4.1 Fine antenna alignment .................................................................................................. 2857.4.2 Preliminary checks.......................................................................................................... 286

7.5 End of commissioning phase 1 (Turn up) in STATION A ................................................. 2877.6 Commissioning station A – phase 2 (acceptance test) .................................................... 288

7.6.1 Installation and cabling visual inspection ........................................................................ 2907.6.2 System configuration ...................................................................................................... 2907.6.3 E1 traffic.......................................................................................................................... 2927.6.4 Ethernet traffic................................................................................................................. 2937.6.5 NE configuration ............................................................................................................. 2937.6.6 Data/Time settings .......................................................................................................... 2947.6.7 Hop E1 stability test ........................................................................................................ 2947.6.8 Ethernet Traffic stability test............................................................................................ 295

7.7 Commissioning station B – Phase 2 (acceptance Test) ................................................... 2997.8 Final operations ................................................................................................................... 2997.9 Annex A: fine antenna alignment ....................................................................................... 299

ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 301

CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK.............................................................................. 307

User Manual

Table of Contents

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 3/308

User Manual

Table of Contents

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0


LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1. Multiservice Aggregation Layer ......................................................................................... 33Figure 2. Service Awareness ............................................................................................................ 33Figure 3. Packet Node ...................................................................................................................... 34Figure 4. Service-driven Packet Adaptive Modulation ...................................................................... 34Figure 5. 9500 MPR System Family ................................................................................................. 35Figure 6. MPT-HC ............................................................................................................................. 37Figure 7. MPT-MC............................................................................................................................. 37Figure 8. MPT-HC connection (electrical cable) ............................................................................... 38Figure 9. MPT-HC connection (optical cable + power supply cable to MSS-1c)............................... 39Figure 10. MPT-HC connection (optical cable + power supply cable to Station battery) .................. 39Figure 11. MPT-MC connection......................................................................................................... 40Figure 12. TDM Over Ethernet Packet Node - Mapping of 10 E1 TDM on Ethernet ........................ 45Figure 13. TDM and Ethernet Terminal Packet Transport 10 E1 TDM and 1 Radio Direction.......... 45Figure 14. MSS-1c block diagram..................................................................................................... 59Figure 15. MSS-1c front view............................................................................................................ 60Figure 16. MSS-1c rear view ............................................................................................................ 60Figure 17. MSS-1c and Fan unit ....................................................................................................... 63Figure 18. MPT system..................................................................................................................... 65Figure 19. 11-38 GHz MPT-HC housing ........................................................................................... 65Figure 20. 6 GHz MPT-HC housing .................................................................................................. 65Figure 21. 7-8 GHz MPT-HC housing ............................................................................................... 66Figure 22. MPT-HC block diagram.................................................................................................... 66Figure 23. 7/8 GHz MPT-HC architecture ......................................................................................... 69Figure 24. 11 to 38 GHz MPT-HC architecture ................................................................................. 69Figure 25. Power Extractor ............................................................................................................... 73Figure 26. 6 GHz and from 11 to 38 GHz MPT-MC housing............................................................. 74Figure 27. 7-8 GHz MPT-MC housing............................................................................................... 75Figure 28. Available loopbacks ......................................................................................................... 77Figure 29. Traffic profiles .................................................................................................................. 79Figure 30. Traffic profiles .................................................................................................................. 80Figure 31. E1 Traffic.......................................................................................................................... 81Figure 32. E1 Traffic.......................................................................................................................... 82Figure 33. E1 Traffic.......................................................................................................................... 83Figure 34. QoS in the MSS-1c .......................................................................................................... 85Figure 35. QoS in the MPT ............................................................................................................... 87Figure 36. Cross-connection............................................................................................................. 89Figure 37. E1 from/to Radio port....................................................................................................... 89Figure 38. E1 from/to Ethernet port .................................................................................................. 90Figure 39. Main view: System Overview........................................................................................... 97Figure 40. Inventory .......................................................................................................................... 101Figure 41. Software Download: Software Package versions ............................................................ 102Figure 42. Software download .......................................................................................................... 103Figure 43. Software Download: Active Software Package summary ................................................ 103Figure 44. Software Download: Stand-by Software Package summary............................................ 104Figure 45. Date/Time Configuration .................................................................................................. 105Figure 46. Site Information................................................................................................................ 106Figure 47. Protection Configuration .................................................................................................. 106Figure 48. Radio Configuration: FCM - RTPC .................................................................................. 109Figure 49. Radio Configuration: FCM - ATPC................................................................................... 109Figure 50. Radio Configuration: ACM - RTPC .................................................................................. 110Figure 51. Advanced Radio Configuration ........................................................................................ 110Figure 52. MSS-1c Configuration...................................................................................................... 111

User Manual

List of Figures

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 5/308

Figure 53. FTP Server Parameters................................................................................................... 112Figure 54. Network Interfaces........................................................................................................... 113Figure 55. Static Routing................................................................................................................... 114Figure 56. Trusted SNMP Managers ................................................................................................ 115Figure 57. Manager registration........................................................................................................ 115Figure 58. Backup / Restore ............................................................................................................. 116Figure 59. Performance History File Upload..................................................................................... 118Figure 60. Counter Thresholds ......................................................................................................... 118Figure 61. 15Min Counter activation ................................................................................................. 119Figure 62. 15Min Counter ................................................................................................................. 119Figure 63. 15Min Counter history...................................................................................................... 120Figure 64. 15Min Counter deactivation ............................................................................................. 120Figure 65. Adaptive Modulation counter activation ........................................................................... 121Figure 66. 15Min Counter ................................................................................................................. 122Figure 67. 15Min Counter history...................................................................................................... 122Figure 68. 15Min Counter deactivation ............................................................................................. 123Figure 69. Ethernet: Qos Counters ................................................................................................... 124Figure 70. Qos Counters example for Aggregate ............................................................................. 125Figure 71. Inventory .......................................................................................................................... 126Figure 72. Loopback activation ......................................................................................................... 127Figure 73. ACM Manual Management .............................................................................................. 127Figure 74. Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 128Figure 75. Alarms.............................................................................................................................. 130Figure 76. Power measurements...................................................................................................... 130Figure 77. Power measurements...................................................................................................... 131Figure 78. Modem measurements .................................................................................................... 132Figure 79. Modem measurements .................................................................................................... 133Figure 80. Events.............................................................................................................................. 134Figure 81. Provisioning Tool: Welcome screen................................................................................. 135Figure 82. Ethernet ports provisioning .............................................................................................. 136Figure 83. Cross connection TDM2TDM .......................................................................................... 138Figure 84. One shot tributaries configuration.................................................................................... 138Figure 85. Cross connection functional scheme ............................................................................... 139Figure 86. Cross connection to user Ethernet port ........................................................................... 140Figure 87. Cross connection functional scheme ............................................................................... 141Figure 88. Management port provisioning ........................................................................................ 142Figure 89. TDM cross connection between radio and Ethernet port................................................. 143Figure 90. Cross connection functional scheme ............................................................................... 144Figure 91. Network Synchronization Clock provisioning................................................................... 144Figure 92. NE bridge mode selection................................................................................................ 145Figure 93. Port VLAN provisioning.................................................................................................... 146Figure 94. Station interconnections with MPT-MC ............................................................................ 149Figure 95. Station interconnections with MPT-HC with Power Extractor........................................... 149Figure 96. Station interconnections with MPT-HC (optical cable + coax. power supply cable to MSS-1c)............................................................................................... 150Figure 97. Station interconnections with MPT-HC (optical cable + coax. power supply cable to Station battery) .................................................................................... 150Figure 98. Fixing the Rack to Floor (1) ............................................................................................. 153Figure 99. Fixing the Rack to Floor (2) ............................................................................................. 154Figure 100. Floor file drilling template............................................................................................... 155Figure 101. Example of securing rack assembly to computer floor .................................................. 156Figure 102. Laborack ........................................................................................................................ 157Figure 103. Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.) ................................................................................................... 158Figure 104. Top Rack Unit - Front/Rear ............................................................................................ 158

User Manual

List of Figures

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0


Figure 105. Top Rack Unit - Fixed to rack......................................................................................... 158Figure 106. TRU Connections .......................................................................................................... 160Figure 107. TRU Grounding position on Laborack ........................................................................... 160Figure 108. ETSI Rack - Ground connection .................................................................................... 161Figure 109. Laborack - Ground connection ...................................................................................... 161Figure 110. Grounding ...................................................................................................................... 163Figure 111. Grounding....................................................................................................................... 163Figure 112. Power supply connector................................................................................................. 163Figure 113. Installation solution......................................................................................................... 164Figure 114. Installation solution......................................................................................................... 164Figure 115. Installation solution......................................................................................................... 165Figure 116. Interconnections to connector support 1.6/5.6 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061AAAA).... 165Figure 117. Interconnections to connector support BNC 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061ABAA) ....... 166Figure 118. Interconnections to support 19 Inch modules 120 ohm Panel 3U (3CC07810AAAA) ... 166Figure 119. ....................................................................................................................................... 167Figure 120. ....................................................................................................................................... 167Figure 121. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (11-38 GHz) ............................................... 169Figure 122. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (6 GHz) ...................................................... 170Figure 123. Views of MPT-HC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz) ........................................ 170Figure 124. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (11-38 GHz) ............................................... 172Figure 125. Views of MPT-HC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz) ........................................ 173Figure 126. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (6 GHz) ...................................................... 174Figure 127. Composition of MPT-HC with external diplexer ............................................................. 175Figure 128. MPT-HC TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces ......................... 176Figure 129. 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC BRANCHING box mistake-proofing............................................... 176Figure 130. Label affixed on the MPT-HC and MPT-HC TRANSCEIVER box.................................. 177Figure 131. Label affixed inside the MPT-HC BRANCHING box ...................................................... 178Figure 132. Example of integrated antenna Pole Mounting (with antenna and nose adapter) ...................................................................................................... 181Figure 133. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" Installation kit (3DB10137AAXX)............................ 182Figure 134. Example of antenna polarization change (“1+0” MPT-HC integrated antenna) ............. 183Figure 135. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC insertion .......................................... 184Figure 136. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (11-38 GHz) ....................................... 184Figure 137. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz: vertical polarization) ....... 185Figure 138. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz: horizontal polarization) ... 185Figure 139. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" installation................................................................ 186Figure 140. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC insertion .......................................... 186Figure 141. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (11-38 GHz with pole mounting P/N 3DB 10137 AAAB) ..................................................................................................................... 187Figure 142. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz with pole mounting P/N 3DB10137AAXX) ....................................................................................................................... 187Figure 143. Locations for Cable Grounds ......................................................................................... 204Figure 144. Views of MPT-MC with embedded diplexer (6 and 11-38 GHz)..................................... 209Figure 145. Views of MPT-MC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)........................................ 210Figure 146. Views of MPT-MC with embedded diplexer (6 and 11-38 GHz)..................................... 211Figure 147. Views of MPT-MC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)........................................ 211Figure 148. Composition of MPT-MC with external diplexer ............................................................. 212Figure 149. MPT-MC TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces ......................... 213Figure 150. 7-8 GHz MPT-MC BRANCHING box mistake-proofing ................................................. 214Figure 151. Label affixed on the MPT-MC and MPT-MC TRANSCEIVER box................................. 215Figure 152. Label affixed inside the MPT-MC BRANCHING box...................................................... 216Figure 153. Example of antenna polarization change (“1+0” MPT-MC integrated antenna)............. 219Figure 154. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-MC insertion.......................................... 220Figure 155. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6 GHz and 11-38 GHz)..................... 220

User Manual

List of Figures

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 7/308

Figure 156. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (7-8 GHz: vertical polarization) .......... 221Figure 157. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (7-8 GHz: horizontal polarization)...... 221Figure 158. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" installation................................................................ 222Figure 159. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-MC insertion.......................................... 222Figure 160. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (with pole mounting P/N 3DB 10137 AAAB) ..................................................................................................................... 223Figure 161. Short kit plug R2CT ....................................................................................................... 224Figure 162. Short kit plug R2CT items.............................................................................................. 224Figure 163. MPT/AWY Service Cord ................................................................................................ 239Figure 164. Checking Feedhead Flange with a Spirit level............................................................... 242Figure 165. Indicative head-on signal pattern for a parabolic antenna ............................................. 244Figure 166. Example Tracking Path Signals ..................................................................................... 245Figure 167. Example Tracking Path Signals on the First Side Lobe................................................. 245Figure 168. PC connection ............................................................................................................... 259Figure 169. Relative positions of stations A and B ........................................................................... 281Figure 170. Test bench for tributary functionality check with MPT-HC/MPT-MC............................... 292Figure 171. Test bench for tributary functionality check with MPT-HC/MPT-MC............................... 294Figure 172. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 1 additional PC and 1 Ethernet cable................................................................................................................................... 296Figure 173. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 2 additional PCs ..... 297Figure 174. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers ................................................................................................................ 298

User Manual

List of Figures

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0


LIST OF TABLES

Table 1. Radio capacity, channelling scheme and modulation (Static Modulation) ........................... 41Table 2. Radio capacity, channelling scheme and modulation (Adaptive Modulation)...................... 43Table 3. MSS-1c item codes ............................................................................................................. 51Table 4. CD-ROM Software codes.................................................................................................... 51Table 5. MPT-HC option.................................................................................................................... 51Table 6. MPT-HC codes with internal diplexer .................................................................................. 52Table 7. MPT-MC codes with internal diplexer .................................................................................. 54Table 8. 7 GHz MPT-MC codes with external diplexer...................................................................... 56Table 9. 7 GHz MPT-HC codes with external diplexer ...................................................................... 56Table 10. 7 GHz Branching assemblies (for MPT-HC and MPT-MC)................................................ 57Table 11. 8 GHz MPT-MC codes with external diplexer .................................................................... 58Table 12. 8 GHz MPT-HC codes with external diplexer .................................................................... 58Table 13. 8 GHz Branching assemblies (for MPT-HC and MPT-MC)................................................ 58Table 14. RSSI Table ........................................................................................................................ 72Table 15. Waveguide Flange Data .................................................................................................... 72Table 16. MPT-HC external interfaces ............................................................................................. 171Table 17. RF interface...................................................................................................................... 171Table 18. MPT-HC Output flanges with external antenna ................................................................. 201Table 19. 6-7-8GHz Flextwist waveguide.......................................................................................... 202Table 20. 11-38GHz Flextwist waveguide ......................................................................................... 202Table 21. MPT-MC external interfaces............................................................................................. 210Table 22. RF interface...................................................................................................................... 210Table 23. Pin Function: Tributaries 1- 8 ............................................................................................ 235Table 24. Pin Function: Tributaries 9- 10 .......................................................................................... 236Table 25. MSS-1c and Fans Alarm Matrix ........................................................................................ 266Table 26. MPT-HC Alarm Matrix ....................................................................................................... 267Table 27. MPT-MC Alarm Matrix ....................................................................................................... 269Table 28. TMN Network Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 274Table 29. Test and commissioning instruments ................................................................................ 280

User Manual

List of Tables

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 9/308

User Manual

List of Tables

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 110/308

PREFACE

Preliminary Information

WARRANTY

Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contract of sale of the equipment to which this handbook refers to.

Alcatel–Lucent makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Alcatel–Lucent will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, inci-dental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

INFORMATION

The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of Alcatel–Lucent.

COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION

The technical information of this manual is the property of Alcatel–Lucent and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS

The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment:

1) Service PersonnelInstallation and service must be carried out by authorized persons having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and service, so as to prevent any personal injury or danger to other persons, as well as prevent-damaging the equipment.

2) Access to the EquipmentAccess to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.

3) Safety RulesRecommended safety rules are indicated in Chapter 1 from page 19.

User Manual

Preface

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 11/308

Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In case of conflict between safety instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will pre-vail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety rules stated in this manual will pre-vail.

SERVICE PERSONNEL SKILL

Service Personnel must have an adequate technical background on telecommunications and in par-ticular on the equipment subject of this handbook.

An adequate background is required to properly install, operate and maintain equipment. The fact of merely reading this handbook is considered as not enough.

Applicability

This handbook applies to the following product–release:

PRODUCT

9500 MPR-E

PRODUCT RELEASE

MSS-1c/MPT-HC/MPT-MC 2.2.0

Scope

This document aims to describe the hardware and software functionalities of the 9500 MPR MPT-Access.

This document is intended to the technicians involved in Planning, in Operation and Maintenance and in Commissioning of the 9500 MPR MPT-Access.

History

ISSUE DATE DESCRIPTIONS

01 October 2010

User Manual

Preface

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 112/308

Change notes

Handbook Structure

This handbook has been edited according to the Alcatel-Lucent standardized “drawing-up guides" com-plying with such suggestion.

This handbook is divided into the main topics described in the table of contents:

PREFACE It contains general information as preliminary information, hand-book scope, history. Furthermore, it describes the handbook struc-ture and the customer documentation.

SAFETY This section includes all the safety instructions.

PRODUCT INFORMATIONAND PLANNING

This section provides the equipment description (at system, MSS-1c and Outdoor levels), introduces the basic information regarding the HW architecture, and gives its technical characteristics.

NE MANAGEMENT BYSOFTWARE APPLICATIONS

This section gives the description and use of the SW tools available for the NE management.

INSTALLATION This section provides whole information regarding Equipment hard-ware installation. Moreover, it contains the whole operative information on:– provisioning of equipment items (P/Ns, equipping rules)– their physical position in the system– unit assembly and front panel drawings, with the description

on the access point usage (connectors, visual indicators, but-tons).

This section provides also the whole operative instructions for the preparation of the Craft Terminal for the Line–Up and Commission-ing of the two NEs making up the radio link.

PROVISIONING This section gives all the instructions to provision (to configure) the NE.

MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE-CLEARING

This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance and system upgrade.

LINE-UP AND COMMISSIONING

This section provides all the instructions for the line-up and com-missioning of the NE.

ABBREVIATIONS The abbreviation list is supplied.

CUSTOMER DOCUMENTA-TION FEEDBACK

It contains info regarding customer opinions collection about this documentation.

User Manual

Preface

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 13/308

General on Alcatel-Lucent Customer Documentation

This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel–Lucent Customer Documentation system, details the association between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Doc-umentation characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating.

Customer–Independent Standard Customer Documentation

a) DefinitionStandard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant–indepen-dent and is always independent of any Customization.Plant–dependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned.N.B. Plant–dependent and Customized documentation is not described here.

b) Aims of standard Customer DocumentationStandard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and maintain-ing the equipment according to Alcatel–Lucent Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In particular:• the contents of the chapters associated to the software applications focus on the explanation

of the man–machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;• maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.N.B. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design andproduction documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.

Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

a) ProductsA “product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performances and services that it is meant for.E.g. 9500 MPR is a product.

b) Product-releasesA ”product” evolves through successive “product–releases”, which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain ”product–release” availability date. A certain ”product–release” performs more functionalities than the previous one.E.g. Rel.1.0 and Rel.2.0 are two successive “product–releases” of the same “product”.A “product–release” comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one “Software Pack-age” (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment perfor-mances that the specific “product–release” has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.

c) Configurations and Network ElementsIn some cases, a “product–release” includes different possible “configurations” which are distin-guished from one another by different “Network Element” (NE) types and, from the management point of view, by different SWPs.

d) SWP releases, versions, and CD–ROMs• Each SWP is distributed by means of a specific SWP CD–ROM.• A SWP is identified by its “Denomination”, “P/N” (Part Number) and “CS” (Change Status), that

are printed on the CD–ROM’s label:– the first and second digits of the “Denomination” (e.g. 2.0) correspond to the “HW product–

release” number;– the third digit of the of the “Denomination” (e.g. 2.0.2) identifies the Version Level of the

SWP.

User Manual

Preface

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 114/308

• A SWP with new Version Level, providing main features in addition to those of the previous Ver-sion Level SWP, is distributed by means of a SWP CD–ROM having new “Denomination”,“P/N” (Part Number), and “CS” restarting from 01

• A SWP patch version, if any, is created to correct SW bugs, and/or to add minor features, andis distributed by means of a SWP CD–ROM, that can be identified:– by the same “P/N” of the former CD–ROM, but with an incremented “CS” number

(e.g.CS=02 instead of previous CS=01)– or by a new “P/N”, and “CS” restarting from 01.

Handbook Updating

The handbooks associated to the "product-release" are listed in “History“ on page 12.

Each handbook is identified by: – the name of the "product–release" (and "version" when the handbook is applicable to the versions

starting from it, but not to the previous ones), – the handbook name, – the handbook Part Number, – the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),– the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date

on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.

Changes introduced in the same product–release (same handbook P/N)

The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:

– only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the edi-torial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.

– the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In this case:

• the changes with respect to the previous edition are listed in “History” on page 12;• in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and draw-

ings.

Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A). Version character can be used for draft or proposal edi-tions.

NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONSHandbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator's Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software "version" distributed to Customers implies man-machine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures.

Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product–release's "version" marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged.

Supplying updated handbooks to Customers

Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to commercial criteria.By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue (sup-plying errata-corrige sheets is not envisaged).

User Manual

Preface

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 15/308

Changes due to new product version

A new product version changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.

Customer documentation on CD-ROM

In the following by 'CD-ROM' it is meant 'Customer Documentation on CD-ROM'

Contents, creation and production of a CD-ROM

In most cases, a CD-ROM contains in read-only eletronic format the documentation of one product-release(-version) and for a certain language.In some other cases, the same CD-ROM can contain the documentation of different product-release(-ver-sion)s for a certain language.

As a general rule:

– CD-ROMs for Network Management products do not contain:

• the Installation Guides

• the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel-Lucent together with the main applicative SW.

– CD-ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain:

• the documentation of system optional features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel-Lucent together with the main equipment).

A CD-ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and documents in .pdf format. Bookmarks and hyperlinks make the navigation easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the documentation present in the CD-ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.

The files processed in this way are added to files/images for managing purpose and a master CD-ROM is recorded.

Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus-free product.

After a complete functional check, the CD-ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the Production Department, so that the CD-ROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.

Use of the CD-ROM

The CD-ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.

The CD-ROM starts automatically with autorun and hyperlinks from the opened “Index" document permit to visualize the .pdf handbooksOther hyperlinks permit to get, from the Technical handbooks, the specific .pdf setting documents.

In order to open the .pdf documents Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 (minimum) must have been installed on the platform.The CD-ROM doesn't contain the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The Customer is in charge of getting and installing it.ReadMe info is present on the CD-ROM to this purpose.

Then the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and zooming tools included in the tool, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.

User Manual

Preface

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 116/308

CD-ROM identification

Each CD-ROM is identified:

1) by external identifiers, that are printed on the CD-ROM upper surface:– the name of the "product-release(s)" (and "version" if applicable) – a writing indicating the language(s),– the CD-ROM Part Number), – the CD-ROM edition (usually first edition=01)

2) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose collection and processing the CD-ROM itself has been created.

CD-ROM updating

The list of source handbook/document P/Ns-editions indicated in previous para. point 2) , in association with the CD-ROM's own P/N-edition, is also loaded in the Alcatel-Information-System as a structured list.Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel-Lucent archive system, a check in the Alcatel-Information-System is made to identify the list of CD-ROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of these handbooks/documents.This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD-ROM.

Updating of CD-ROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks com-posing the collection.

User Manual

Preface

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 17/308

User Manual

Preface

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 118/308

1 Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Labelling

This chapter describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be con-sidered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.

This chapter is organized as follows:

– Declaration of conformity to CE marking and Countries List

– Specific label for MPR equipment

– Applicable standards and recommendations

– Safety Rules

– Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

– Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges

– Cautions to avoid equipment damage

User Manual

Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 19/308

1.1 Declaration of conformity to CE marking and Countries List

Indication of the countries where the equipment is intended to be used: Austria (AT) - Belgium (BE) - Bulgaria (BG) - Switzerland/Liechtenstein (CH) - Cyprus (CY) - Czech Republic (CZ) - Germany (DE) - Denmark (DK) - Estonia (EE) - Finland (FI) - France (FR) - Greece (GR) - Hungary (HU) – Italy (IT) - Ireland (IE) - Iceland (IS) - Lithuania (LT) – Luxembourg (LU) - Latvia (LV) - Malta (MT) - Netherlands (NL) - Norway (NO) –Poland (PL) – Portugal (PT) - Romania (RO) – Spain (SP) - Sweden (SE) - Slovenia (SI) - Slovak Republic (SK) -United Kingdom (UK)

Indication of the intended use of the equipment: Point to Point PDH/Ethernet Transport radio Link

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 120/308

1.2 Specific label for MPR equipment

The label is sticked on the MSS-1c and on the MPT-HC/MPT-MC.

Field Field Name Note

A Alcatel-Lucent Logo

B Equipment acronym

C Power Supply range See NB 1 for MSS-1cSee NB 2 for MPT-HCSee NB 3 for MPT-MCD Current range

E European Community Logo

F Not harmonized frequency logo

G WEEE Logo

H Electrostatic Device Logo

NB 1: – 38.4 V / - 57.6 V; 3.3 A max.

NB 2: – 28 V / - 58 V; 1.6 A / 0.8 A

NB 3: – 28 V / - 58 V; 1.6 A / 0.8 A

1.3 Applicable standards and recommendations

1999/5/CE of 09 March 1999

Safety: EN 60950, EN 60825-1, EN 60825-2, EN 50385

EMC: EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-4

Spectrum: EN 302 217-2-2

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 21/308

1.4 Safety Rules

1.4.1 General Rules

Before carrying out any installation, turn-on, tests or operation and maintenance operations, read carefully the related sections of this Manual, in particular:

– Hardware Installation

– Commissioning

– Maintenance and Upgrade

Observe safety rules

– When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools.

– In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical assistance is meant: • "personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be aware

of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary measure-ments to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others".

• The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts. • The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified is

not permitted. • The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give access

to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel.

– For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any inflam-mable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions ect.

– It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.

The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safe-guard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety, i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.

Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.

To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame).

The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and statement:

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 122/308

1.4.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command

It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.

– dangerous electrical voltages – harmful optical signals – risk of explosion – moving mechanical parts – heat-radiating Mechanical Parts – microwave radiations

Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed.

The symbols presented in following paragraphs are all the possible symbols that could be present on Alca-tel-Lucent equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this handbook refers to.

Dangerous Electrical Voltages

[1] Labeling

The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).

If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equip-ment will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:

[2] Safety instructions

DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:

Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where D.C. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules:

• Personal injury can be caused by -48VDC. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.

• Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, DC circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

Note

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 23/308

Risks of Explosions: labeling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signaled by the following label:

Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow (battery-emitted hydrogen). A 417-IEC-5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the openings must not be covered up.

Moving Mechanical Parts: labeling and safety instructions

The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:

Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been stopped.

Equipment connection to earth

Terminals for equipment connection to earth , to be done according to international safety standards, are pointed out by the suitable symbol:

The position of earth connection terminals is specified in the Hardware Installation section.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 124/308

Heat-radiating Mechanical Parts: labeling and safety instructions

The presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:

DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:

Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heat-radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:

Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.

Optical safety

The equipment contains Class 1 laser component according to IEC 60825-1 (par. 5).

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

The laser source is placed in the optional SFP plug-in, which has to be installed in the MSS-1c. The laser source is placed in the left side of the SFP plug-in.

According to the IEC 60825-1 the explanatory label is not sticked on the equipment due to the lack of space.

Microwave radiations (EMF norms)

Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation procedure):

The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive.

The following rules should be strictly applied by Customer:

– Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general public.

– Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked.

– Workers should be allowed to switch-off the power if they have to operate inside compliance bound-aries.

– Assure good cable connection.

– Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access ( if possible the cylinder delimitating the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than 2 meters high).

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 25/308

– Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power.

Anyway remind that someone standing in front of the 9500 MPR antenna may cause traffic shutdown.

Place the relevant stickers:

EMF emission warning sign

On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance boundaries and/or the transmission area of the antenna, i.e. roof top installation)

– Warning label "Do not stand on the antenna axis"

On the mast (front side)

– EMF emission warning sign (Yellow and black) to be placed at bottom of antenna, visible by some-one moving in front of the antenna (roof top installation)

On the antenna (rear side)

– EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna.

1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

The equipment's EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination, grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).

Before carrying out any installation, turn-on, tests & operation and maintenance operations, read carefully the related sections of this Manual, in particular:

– Hardware Installation

– Maintenance and Upgrade

The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this Manual by the symbol and term:

EMC Norms

[1] EMC General Norms - Installation

• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this Manual or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in the Customer's "Installation Norms" (or similar documents)

• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated

• Install filters outside the equipment as required

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 126/308

• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper diameter and impedance

• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before having cleaned and degrease it

• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (con-tact springs and connection points, etc.)

• Screw fasten the units to the subrack

• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given

[2] EMC General Norms - Turn-on, Tests & Operation

• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility

• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers, ESD connector protections, etc.)

• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given

[3] EMC General Norms - Maintenance

• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)

• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well

• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

1.6 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary mea-sures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated the maintenance and monitoring operations.

Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning labels have been affixed:

Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the instal-lation/maintenance phases.

Workers are supplied with anti static protection devices consisting of:

– an elasticized band worn around the wrist

– a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 27/308

1.7 Cautions to avoid equipment damage

a. Anti static protection device kit

Whenever is necessary to handle spare parts and cards out of their own box, this kit (Illustration below) must be always warn and its termination must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoid the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges.

Anti static protection device kit

b. Screw fixing

In normal operation conditions, all screws (for unit box closing, cable fixing, etc.) must be always tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure the equipment EMI-EMC performance.

The screw tightening torque must be:

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) ±10 %

2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) ±10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.

c. MSS-1c-ODU cable disconnection / connection

Before to disconnect or connect the MSS-1c-ODU cable (at MSS-1c or ODU side) switch off the cor-responding MSS-1c Unit.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 128/308

2 Product information and planning– 9500 Family overview (par. 2.1 on page 31)

• 9500 MPR System Family (par. 2.1.1 on page 35) • Family elements described in this User Manual (par. 2.1.2 on page 36) • MSS-1c (par. 2.1.3 on page 36)• MPT-HC (par. 2.1.4 on page 37)• MPT-MC (par. 2.1.5 on page 37)• MSS-1c to MPT-HC interconnection (par. 2.1.6 on page 38)• MSS-1c to MPT-MC interconnection (par. 2.1.7 on page 40)• Antennas (par. 2.1.8 on page 40)

– Radio capacity, channelling and modulation (MPT-HC/MPT-MC) (par. 2.2 on page 41)

– Standard Features (par. 2.3 on page 44)

– Radio Configurations (par. 2.4 on page 44)

– Typical System Configurations (par. 2.5 on page 45)

– Environmental and Electrical Characteristics (par. 2.6 on page 46)• General characteristics (MSS-1c) (par. 2.6.1 on page 46)• General characteristics (MPT-HC/MPT-MC) (par. 2.6.2 on page 47)• MPT-HC characteristics (par. 2.6.4 on page 49)

– 6 to 13 GHz (par. 2.6.4.1 on page 49)– 15 to 38 GHz (par. 2.6.4.2 on page 49)

• MPT-MC characteristics (par. 2.6.3 on page 48)– 6 to 13 GHz (par. 2.6.3.1 on page 48)– 15 to 38 GHz (par. 2.6.3.2 on page 48)

• Radio performances (par. 2.6.5 on page 49) • General characteristics (MSS-1c) (par. 2.6.1 on page 46) • General characteristics (Power Extractor) (par. 2.6.6 on page 50)

– Parts Lists (par. 2.7 on page 51)• MSS-1c (par. 2.7.1 on page 51) • MPT-HC optical interface option (par. 2.7.2 on page 51) • MPT-HC with internal diplexer (par. 2.7.3 on page 52) • MPT-MC with internal diplexer (par. 2.7.4 on page 54) • MPT-HC/MPT-MC with external diplexer (7/8 GHz) (par. 2.7.5 on page 56)

– Functional description (par. 2.8 on page 59)• MSS-1c (Indoor Unit) (par. 2.8.1 on page 59)

– Power supply (par. 2.8.1.2 on page 61)– Ethernet switch (par. 2.8.1.3 on page 61)– E1 Interface (par. 2.8.1.4 on page 61)– MPT Interface (par. 2.8.1.5 on page 62)

• Fan unit (par. 2.8.2 on page 63)• MPT-HC (par. 2.8.3 on page 64)

– MPT-HC block diagram (par. 2.8.3.1 on page 66)

User Manual

Product information and planning

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 29/308

– RSSI Monitoring Point (par. 2.8.3.2 on page 72)– Waveguide Flange Data (par. 2.8.3.3 on page 72)

• Power Extractor (par. 2.8.4 on page 73)• MPT-MC (par. 2.8.5 on page 74)• Radio Transmission Features with MPT-HC/MPT-MC (par. 2.8.6 on page 75)

– Frequency Agility (par. 2.8.6.1 on page 75)– Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) (par. 2.8.6.2 on page 75)– Transmitted power control: RTPC function (par. 2.8.6.3 on page 76)– Power Monitoring (par. 2.8.6.4 on page 76)– Adaptive Equalization (par. 2.8.6.5 on page 76)– Link identifier (par. 2.8.6.6 on page 76)– Loopbacks (par. 2.8.6.7 on page 76)– Loopback activation (par. 2.8.6.8 on page 77)– Loopback life time (par. 2.8.6.9 on page 78)

• TMN communication channels (par. 2.8.7 on page 78)• Traffic profiles (par. 2.8.8 on page 79)

– TDM2TDM (par. 2.8.8.1 on page 81)– TDM2Eth (par. 2.8.8.2 on page 82)– ETH2ETH (par. 2.8.8.3 on page 83)

• Ethernet Traffic Management (par. 2.8.9 on page 84)– Bridge type change (par. 2.8.9.1 on page 84)– Reserved Multicast Addresses (par. 2.8.9.2 on page 84)

• Quality Of Services (QoS) (par. 2.8.10 on page 85)– QoS in the MSS-1c (par. 2.8.10.1 on page 85)– QoS in the MPT (par. 2.8.10.2 on page 87)

• Cross-connections (par. 2.8.11 on page 89)– E1 Cross-connection (par. 2.8.11.1 on page 89)– Ethernet flows (par. 2.8.11.2 on page 90)

• Synchronization (par. 2.8.12 on page 91)– Synchronization overview (par. 2.8.12.1 on page 91)– Synchronization interface (par. 2.8.12.2 on page 93)

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 130/308

2.1 9500 Family overview

9500MPR introduces new elements to the microwave packet family. The most compact IDU solutions (MSS-1c) for E1 and Ethernet hybrid connectivity as well as with a zero footprint solution (no IDU) addressing full out-door applications. The new set of multipurpose ODUs, the MPT addressing any appli-cation in the microwave domain. Stand alone as well as coupled in split mount solutions applications depending on the network requirement and layout. The MPT is available in a variety of flavors to address in the most cost effective the different part of the network, this also include millimeter wavelength.

The 9500 Microwave Packet Radio (MPR) is a microwave digital radio family that supports both PDH and packet data (Ethernet) for migrating from TDM to IP. The 9500 MPR provides a generic, modular IP platform for multiple network applications (including 2G/3G/HSDPA/WiMAX backhauling to Metro Ethernet areas) to accommodate broadband services. The 9500 MPR radio family supports low, medium, and high capacity applications using European data rates, frequencies, channel plans, and tributary interfaces:

– TDM/PDH Data Rates: E1

– ATM Data Rates: E1

– Ethernet Data Speed: 10, 100, 1000 Mb/s

– RF Frequency Range: 6 to 38 GHz

Three types of Indoor Units are available:

1) MSS-8, a 2U shelf, connected to an outdoor RF unit (split mount system). Supported ODUs:– ODU300– MPT-HC– MPT-MC

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 31/308

2) MSS-4, one 1U shelf, connected to an outdoor RF unit (split mount system). Supported ODUs:– ODU300– MPT-HC– MPT-MC

3) MSS-1c. Compact IDU that complements the existing portfolio addressing the last mile, the far end application in nodal solution and cost optimized point-to-point applications. Its small size of 1U height and half rack width drastically reduces the space consumption in busy sites. Supported ODUs:– MPT-HC– MPT-MC

MPT is a new multipurpose ODU to address any microwave application, extremely compact in size pro-viding:

– MPT-MC: 155 Mbps max.

– MPT-HC: 340 Mbps max.

MPT-xx can be deployed in stand-alone configuration (9500 MPR-e) or it can be deployed in split mount solution connected to any MSS-x IDU.

– Up to 12 MPT connected to an MSS-8; highest density ever

– Up to 6 MPT connected to an MSS-4; highest density ever

– Up to 2 MPT HC/MC connected to MSS-1c (up to 1 limited in the current version)

9500 MPR-e is the stand alone, full outdoor application of the MPT xx to address full Ethernet site back-hauling (fix or mobile alike) and to address converged MPLS metro networks reducing the number of deployed equipment.

The 9500 MPR innovative solutions mainly are:

[1] Multiservice aggregation layer: the capacity to use Ethernet as a common transmission layer to transport any kind of traffic, independently by the type of interface. Ethernet becomes the conver-gence layer.

[2] Service awareness: traffic handling and quality management, queuing traffic according to the type of service assigned, independently by the type of interface

[3] Packet node: no service aggregation limits with all traffic aggregated in packets, in term of: capacity, type of service requirements and type of interface

[4] Service-driven adaptive modulation: fully exploit the air bandwidth in its entirety by changing mod-ulation scheme according to the propagation availability and allocate transport capacity, discrimi-nating traffic by different services, only possible in a packet-based environment.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 132/308

[1] Multiservice aggregation layer

Figure 1. Multiservice Aggregation Layer

9500 MPR aggregates and carries over a COMMON PACKET LAYER: TDM 2G, 3G and IP/Ethernet. This allows sharing of common packet transmission infrastructures, regardless of the nature of carried traffic.

Due to the nature of Ethernet, each service can be discriminated based on several parameters like quality of service.

Mapping different access technologies over Ethernet is achieved by standardized protocols like circuit emulation and pseudo-wire.

[2] Service awareness

Figure 2. Service Awareness

Service awareness means the ability to discriminate the different traffic types carried over the converged Ethernet stream. The traffic flow can be composed by E1 and/or IP/Eth, coming from different sources, and therefore having different requirements.

Service awareness is what allows identifying the traffic types, and in case of the non real time variable bit rate one, optimize the band with overbooking of the radio scarce resource.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 33/308

[3] Packet node

Figure 3. Packet Node

9500 MPR offers a SINGLE PACKET MATRIX able to switch, aggregate and handle any of the possible incoming traffic types with virtually no capacity limits (up to 10 GBps).

[4] Service-driven adaptive modulation

Figure 4. Service-driven Packet Adaptive Modulation

Traffic with high priority will always have bandwidth available, like voice (deterministic approach).

Broadband traffic is discriminated by QoS dynamically, with modulation scheme changes driven by propagation conditions.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 134/308

2.1.1 9500 MPR System Family

Figure 5. 9500 MPR System Family

9500 MPR in the stand alone (zero-footprint) architecture is built by only one unit for Ethernet applications:

– Outdoor Unit.

– Outdoor Unit is connected to the MPLS metro networks equipment with one coaxial cable for the power supply and one Ethernet optical or electrical cable (with MPT).

9500 MPR in the split mount architecture is built by two separate units:

– MSS (Microwave Service Switch): indoor unit for split mount and stand alone configurations (Ether-net uplink)

– Outdoor Unit.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 35/308

2.1.2 Family elements described in this User Manual

In this User Manual the access solution with the MSS-1c and MPT-HC/MPT-MC is described:

The implemented radio configuration is 1+0.

The MSS-1c can collect up to 10 TDM flows and Ethernet flows.

The MSS-1c interfaces the Outdoor Unit (MPT-HC or MPT-MC) thanks to its Ethernet interface.

MPT-HC or MPT-MC is in a charge of transporting the flows in an efficient way (bandwidth optimization, Quality of service, respect to TDM contraints ....).

2.1.3 MSS-1c

The MSS-1c provides user port interface, cross-connection and switching management.

The cross-connection matrix implements all the cross-connections between the User ports (4 Ethernet ports and 10 E1 streams) and the Radio port. The matrix is a standard Ethernet switch, based on VLAN, assigned by the MCT.

The 10xE1 enter the LIU and then the IWF, which manages the encapsulation/reconstruction of PDH data to/from standard Ethernet packets and sends/receives standard Ethernet packets to/from the Ethernet switch.

The Radio Interface interfaces the MPT-HC or the MPT-MC. The radio interface is a standard GbEth inter-face electrical for MPT-MC, electrical or optical for MPT-HC. It sends/receives standard Ethernet packets to/from the Ethernet switch.

In case of electrical radio interface, on the same cable is also sent the power supply for the MPT by using the Power Feed over Ethernet (PFoE) function.

To connect MSS-1c and MPT-HC with only one electrical cable, the Power Extractor must be installed close to the MPT-HC. In this case the interconnection between the MSS-1c and the MPT-HC is made with a single electrical Ethernet cable by using the Power Feed over Ethernet (Ethernet traffic and Power Sup-ply on the same cable). The Power Extractor then separates the Power Supply from the Ethernet traffic, which are separately sent to the MPT-HC.

The MPT-HC can be connected also by using an optical cable for the Ethernet traffic and a coaxial cable for the power supply.

Note

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 136/308

2.1.4 MPT-HC

MPT-HC is a Microwave Equipment capable of transporting the Ethernet traffic over an RF radio channel.

MPT-HC is a microprocessor-controlled equipment that interfaces the MSS-1c with the antenna.

The input interface can be a standard electrical Giga Ethernet interface, connected to the Power Extractor as shown in Figure 8. or a standard optical Giga Ethernet interface, connected to the MSS-1c as shown in Figure 9..

The Ethernet traffic is transmitted over the radio channel according to the configured QoS and to the scheduler algorithms.

Transmitter circuits in the MPT-HC consist of Ethernet input interface, modulator, local oscillator, upcon-verter/mixer, power amplifier, and diplexer.

Receiver circuits consist of diplexer, low-noise amplifier, local oscillator, downconverter/mixer, automatic gain control, demodulator and Ethernet output interface.

The microprocessor manages the frequency, transmit power alarming, and performance monitoring.

The power is provided from the Power Extractor to the MPT-HC DC-DC converter through a dedicated power supply cable.

The MPT-HC is frequency dependent.

Figure 6. MPT-HC

2.1.5 MPT-MC

MPT-MC is similar to MPT-HC from architecture standpoint. MPT-MC has limited capacity vs MPT-HC and is natively Ethernet powered (no Power Extractor is required).

Figure 7. MPT-MC

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 37/308

2.1.6 MSS-1c to MPT-HC interconnection

2.1.6.1 Electrical cable

One electrical Ethernet cable connects the MSS-1c to its MPT-HC.

The max cable length is 100 m.

The Ethernet electrical cable is provided with connectors to be mounted on site with the specific RJ45 tool (1AD160490001).

Figure 8. MPT-HC connection (electrical cable)

With the MPT-HC the Power Extractor must be installed close to the MPT-HC. In this case the intercon-nection between the MSS-1c and the MPT-HC is made with a single electrical Ethernet cable by using the Power Feed over Ethernet (Ethernet traffic and Power Supply on the same cable). The Power Extrac-tor then separates the Power Supply from the Ethernet traffic, which are separately send to the MPT-HC.

Note

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 138/308

2.1.6.2 Optical cable

One optical Ethernet cable connects the MSS-1c to its MPT-HC.


A coaxial cable connects the MPT-HC to the MSS-1c (Figure 9) or to Station battery (Figure 10).

Figure 9. MPT-HC connection (optical cable + power supply cable to MSS-1c)

Figure 10. MPT-HC connection (optical cable + power supply cable to Station battery)

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 39/308

2.1.7 MSS-1c to MPT-MC interconnection

One electrical Ethernet cable connects the MSS-1c to its MPT-MC.


The Ethernet electrical cable is provided with connectors to be mounted on site with the specific RJ45 tool (1AD160490001).

Figure 11. MPT-MC connection

2.1.8 Antennas

Antennas for direct mounting an MPT are available in diameters from 0.3 m to 1.8 m, depending on the frequency band.

A polarization rotator is included within the antenna collar, and direct-mounting equal or unequal loss couplers are available for single antenna protected operation.

Antenna mounts are designed for use on industry-standard 114 mm OD pipe-mounts.

An MPT can also be used with standard antennas via a remote-mount kit and flexible waveguide.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 140/308

2.2 Radio capacity, channelling and modulation (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)

Table 1. Radio capacity, channelling scheme and modulation (Static Modulation)

Channel Spacing(MHz)

FCM Mode ETSI Class # E1(TDM2TDM)

Typical Ethernet Throughput (1518 bytes)

3.5

QPSK 2 2 4,2 Mbit/s

8PSK 2 3 6,8 Mbit/s

16 QAM 4 4 8,5 Mbit/s

32 QAM 4 5 10,8 Mbit/s

64 QAM 5 6 13,5 Mbit/s

7

QPSK 2 4 8,8 Mbit/s

8PSK 2 6 13,5 Mbit/s

16 QAM 4 9 19,4 Mbit/s

32 QAM 4 11 24,2 Mbit/s

64 QAM 5 13 29,6 Mbit/s

128 QAM 5 16 35,4 Mbit/s

256 QAM (NB3) 6 19 40,6 Mbit/s

14

QPSK 2 9 19,9 Mbit/s

8PSK 2 14 30,0 Mbit/s

16 QAM 4 19 40,7 Mbit/s

32 QAM 4 23 50,3 Mbit/s

64 QAM 5 29 62,0 Mbit/s

128 QAM 5 34 73,5 Mbit/s

256 QAM (NB3) 6 41 86,7 Mbit/s

28

QPSK 2 19 41,1 Mbit/s

QPSK 2 (NB1) 20 42,8 Mbit/s

8PSK 2 29 61,9 Mbit/s

16 QAM 4 39 83,5 Mbit/s

16 QAM 4 (NB1) 41 87,1 Mbit/s

32 QAM 4 50 106,9 Mbit/s

64 QAM 5 60 128,3 Mbit/s

128 QAM 5 71 151,8 Mbit/s

256 QAM (NB3) 6 85 180,0 Mbit/s

40 (NB2)64 QAM 5 88 186,0 Mbit/s

128 QAM 5 104 220,0 Mbit/s

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 41/308

N.B.1: New ETSI mask.

N.B.2: MPT-MC does not support this Channel Spacing.

N.B.3: MPT-MC does not support this FCM mode.

56 (NB2)

16 QAM 4 75 159,1 Mbit/s

16 QAM 4 (NB1) 76 161,0 Mbit/s

32 QAM 4 92 195,4 Mbit/s

64 QAM 5 119 252,0 Mbit/s

128 QAM 5 141 298,0 Mbit/s

256 QAM 6 160 339,1 Mbit/s

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 142/308

Table 2. Radio capacity, channelling scheme and modulation (Adaptive Modulation)

Channel Spacing(MHz)

ACM ModeReference

ETSI Class Modulation range Typical EthernetThroughput(1518 bytes)

3.5QPSK 2 QPSK to 64 QAM 4,3 Mbit/s

16 QAM 4 16 QAM to 64 QAM 8,5 Mbit/s

7

QPSK 2 QPSK to 256 QAM 8,8 Mbit/s




14





28


QPSK 2U QPSK to 256 QAM 42,8 Mbit/s


16 QAM 4U 16 QAM to 256 QAM 87,1 Mbit/s



40 (NB1) 64 QAM 5 64 QAM to 128 QAM 186,0 Mbit/s

56 (NB1)


16 QAM 4U 16 QAM to 256 QAM 161,0 Mbit/s



N.B.1: MPT-MC does not support this Channel Spacing.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 43/308

2.3 Standard Features

More radio and site scalability and flexibility for installation teams:

– Limited need for factory presetting channel frequency or bandwidth

– Supports cellular mobile networks, and microcellular network back and common carrier, private carrier and data networks, and utility haul applications.

– 2G, 2.5G, and 3G network compatible

– Outdoor Unit capacity and modulation independent

– Outdoor Unit can support either split-mount and full-outdoor architecture with the same hardware

– Flexible aggregate capacity sharing between E1 and Ethernet

– Adaptive packet transport that improves performance for priority services

– Output power agility

– ATPC

– Adaptive Modulation

– Packet-based internal cross-connect

– TDM MEF8 encapsulation

– Electrical GE interfaces

– Software-based configuration

– High Switching Capacity

2.4 Radio Configurations

In the current release the following radio configuration is available:

– 1+0 in split-mount

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 144/308

2.5 Typical System Configurations

– TDM Over Ethernet Packet Node - Mapping of 10 E1 TDM on Ethernet (Figure 12.)

N.B. In this case a connected MPT is needed in order to configure the cross-connections.

– TDM and Ethernet Terminal Packet Transport 10 E1 TDM and 1 Radio Direction (Figure 13.)

MSS-1c

Packet SW

10 E

1 TD

MIn

terfa

ce

Bui

lt-in

Eth

erne

t

Figure 12. TDM Over Ethernet Packet Node - Mapping of 10 E1 TDM on Ethernet

MSS-1c

Packet SW

10 E

1 TD

MIn

terfa

ce

Bui

lt-in

Eth

erne

t

RadioInterface

MPT

Figure 13. TDM and Ethernet Terminal Packet Transport 10 E1 TDM and 1 Radio Direction

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 45/308

2.6 Environmental and Electrical Characteristics

– General characteristics (MSS-1c) (par. 2.6.1)

– General characteristics (MPT-HC/MPT-MC) (par. 2.6.2)

– MPT-MC characteristics (par. 2.6.3)

– MPT-HC characteristics (par. 2.6.4)

– Radio performances (par. 2.6.5)

– General characteristics (Power Extractor) (par. 2.6.6)

2.6.1 General characteristics (MSS-1c)

Power Injector

Input Voltage range -38.4 to -57.6 Vdc

Standards Compliance (Power Injector)

EMC EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-4, EN 55022 Class B

Stationary use ETS 300 019 1-3, Class 3.2

Storage ETS 300 019 2-1, Class 1.2

Transportation ETS 300 019 2-2, Class 2.3

Safety EN 60950

Environmental

Operating Temperature -20° to +50° C (without FAN unit)-20° to +65° C (with FAN unit)

Cold start-up -40° C

Humidity 0 to 95%, non condensing

Management

Protocol SNMP

Interface, electrical Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T

Interface, electrical physical RJ-45

Routing Protocols supported Static routing

Network Management Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMSAlcatel-Lucent 1352 CompactAlcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 146/308

2.6.2 General characteristics (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)

General with MPT-HC

Operating Frequency Range 6 - 38 GHz

Max. Ethernet throughput 340 Mbps

Bandwidth up to 56 MHz

Modulation Options in FCM QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM, 256 QAM

Adaptive Modulation QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM, 256 QAM

General with MPT-MC

Operating Frequency Range 6 - 38 GHz

Max. Ethernet throughput 155 Mbps

Bandwidth up to 28 MHz

Modulation Options in FCM QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM

Adaptive Modulation QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM

Radio Path Protection Options

Non Protected, 1+0

Standards Compliance (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)


Stationary use ETS 300 019, Class 4.1

Storage ETS 300 019, Class 1.2

Transportation ETS 300 019, Class 2.3

Safety IEC 60950-1/EN 60950-1

Radio Frequency EN 302 217 Classes 2, 4 & E5

Water Ingress IEC 60529 (IPX6)

Environmental

Operating Temperature(Guaranteed)

-33° to +55° C

Start up temperature from low temperature

-40° C

Humidity(Guaranteed)

0 to 100%

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 47/308

2.6.3 MPT-MC characteristics

2.6.3.1 6 to 13 GHz

System

Frequency Range, GHz 5.925 - 6.425

6.425 - 7.11

7.125 - 7.9

7.725 - 8.5

10.7 - 11.7

12.75 - 13.25

T-R Spacings supported MHz 252.04 340 154-161-168-196

119-126-294-305-311-32

490-500-530

266

Antenna Interface

Waveguide Type WR137 WR137 WR112 WR113 WR75 WR62

Typical power consumption 38 W

Guaranteed power consumption

2.6.3.2 15 to 38 GHz

System


17.7 - 19.7

21.2 - 23.632

24.52 - 26.483

37.0 - 39.46

T-R Spacings supported MHz 420- 490 1008-1010- 1560

1008- 1050-1200-1232

1008 1260

Antenna Interface

Waveguide Type WR62 WR42 WR42 WR42 WR28



L6 GHz U6 GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz

40 W

15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz

40 W

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 148/308

2.6.4 MPT-HC characteristics

2.6.4.1 6 to 13 GHz

System


6.425 - 7.11

7.125 - 7.9

7.725 - 8.5

10.7 - 11.7

12.75 - 13.25

T-R Spacings supported MHz 252.04 340 154, 161, 168, 196,

245

119; 126; 151.614;

208; 213,5;

266; 294; 305;

311.32

490-530 266

Antenna Interface

Waveguide Type WR137 WR137 WR112 WR113 WR75 WR62



2.6.4.2 15 to 38 GHz

System


17.7 - 19.7

21.2 - 23.632

24.52 - 26.483

37.0 - 39.46

T-R Spacings supported MHz 308-315-322, 420, 490, 644,

728

1008-1010,

1560, 340

1008- 1050-1200-1232

1008 1260

Antenna Interface

Waveguide Type WR62 WR42 WR42 WR42 WR28



2.6.5 Radio performances

The radio performances are provided in the “Technical Description” document.

L6 GHz U6 GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz

42 W

15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz

42 W

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 49/308

2.6.6 General characteristics (Power Extractor)

Standards Compliance (Power Extractor)


Stationary use ETS 300 019 2-4, Class 4M5 sinusoidal, random and shock

Storage ETS 300 019, Class 1.3

Transportation ETS 300 019 2-2, Class 2.3

Safety EN 60950

Environmental

Operating Temperature(Guaranteed)

-33° to +55° C

Start up temperature from low temperature

-40° C

Humidity(Guaranteed)

0 to 100%

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 150/308

2.7 Parts Lists

2.7.1 MSS-1c

Table 3. MSS-1c item codes

APR Name APR Code Remarks

MSS-1c 3DB18613AAXX

Fan unit 3DB77002AAXX To be installed if the ambient temperature is higher than 50°C

SFP 1000Base-Lx 1AB187280040 To be installed in the Ethernet user port 3 or 4 (option)

SFP 1000Base-Sx 1AB187280045 To be installed in the Ethernet user port 3 or 4 (option)

SFP 1000Base-Sx 1AB383760001 To be installed in the Ethernet user port 3 or 4 (option)

SFP 1000base-T 1AB359780001 To be installed in the Ethernet user port 3 or 4 (option)

Table 4. CD-ROM Software codes

APR Name APR Code

TCO Software Suite Rel 4.2 CD-ROM 3DB75013AAXX

SWP MPR-E Rel 2.2 PACKET CD-ROM 3DB18723ACXX

SWP MPR-E Rel 2.2 HYBRID CD-ROM 3DB18722ACXX

9500 MPR Rel 2.2User Manual CD-ROM EN

3DB18783AAXX

2.7.2 MPT-HC optical interface option

Table 5. MPT-HC option

APR Name APR Code Remarks

SFP 1000Base-Sx 1AB 38376 0001 Optical SFP module to be installed optionally in the MPT-HC to provide the optical Giga Ethernet interface

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 51/308

2.7.3 MPT-HC with internal diplexer

Table 6. MPT-HC codes with internal diplexer

Band (GHz) Shifter (MHz) Tx sub-band APR codes Tx frequency (MHz)

L6 252 1 3DB20441ABXX 5930-6049

1P 3DB20443ABXX 6182-6302

2 3DB20442ABXX 6048-6168

2P 3DB20444ABXX 6301-6420

U6 340 1 3DB20437ABXX 6420-6600

1P 3DB20439ABXX 6760-6940

2 3DB20438ABXX 6565-6745

2P 3DB20440ABXX 6905-7085

3 3DB20464ABXX 6595-6775

3P 3DB20465ABXX 6935-7115

11 530-490 1 3DB20371ABXX 10695-10955

1P 3DB20547ABXX 11205-11485

2 3DB20546ABXX 10935-11205

2P 3DB20548ABXX 11445-11705

13 266 1 3DB20372ABXX 12750-12865

1P 3DB20420ABXX 13016-13131

2 3DB20419ABXX 12861-12980

2P 3DB20421ABXX 13127-13246

15 308-315-322 1 3DB20466ABXX 14630-14766

1P 3DB20468ABXX 14945-15081

2 3DB20467ABXX 14759-14899

2P 3DB20469ABXX 15074-15215

420-475 1 3DB20373ABXX 14500-14724

1P 3DB20423ABXX 14920-15144

420 2 3DB20422ABXX 14710-14941

2P 3DB20424ABXX 15130-15361

490 1 3DB20425ABXX 14400-14635

1P 3DB20427ABXX 14890-15125

2 3DB20426ABXX 14625-14860

2P 3DB20428ABXX 15115-15350

640-644-728 1 3DB20448ABXX 14500-14700

1P 3DB20449ABXX 15144-15348

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 152/308

18 1560 1 3DB20432ABXX 17700-18140

1P 3DB20433ABXX 19260-19700

340 1 3DB20549ABXX 18581-18700

1P 3DB20551ABXX 18920-19040

2 3DB20550ABXX 18701-18820

2P 3DB20552ABXX 19040-19160

1008-1010 1 3DB20374ABXX 17700-18201

1P 3DB20430ABXX 18710-19211

2 3DB20429ABXX 18180-18690

2P 3DB20431ABXX 19190-19700

23 1200-1232 1 3DB20473ABXX 21198-21819

1P 3DB20475ABXX 22400-23019

1050-1200-1232 2 3DB20474ABXX 21781-22400

2P 3DB20476ABXX 22981-23600

1008 1 3DB20375ABXX 22000-22315

1P 3DB20471ABXX 23008-23323

2 3DB20470ABXX 22300-22600

2P 3DB20472ABXX 23308-23608

25 1008 1 3DB20376ABXX 24540-24997

1P 3DB20554ABXX 25548-26005

2 3DB20553ABXX 24994-25448

2P 3DB20555ABXX 26002-26456

38 1260 1 3DB20458ABXX 37050-37620

1P 3DB20460ABXX 38310-38880

2 3DB20459ABXX 37619-38180

2P 3DB20461ABXX 38879-39440

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 53/308

2.7.4 MPT-MC with internal diplexer

Table 7. MPT-MC codes with internal diplexer


L6 252 1 3DB20838AAXX 5930-6049

1P 3DB20840AAXX 6182-6302

2 3DB20839AAXX 6048-6168

2P 3DB20841AAXX 6301-6420

11 490-530 1 3DB20874AAXX 10695-10955

1P 3DB20876AAXX 11205-11485

2 3DB20875AAXX 10935-11205

2P 3DB20877AAXX 11445-11705

13 266 1 3DB20818AAXX 12750-12865

1P 3DB20820AAXX 13016-13131

2 3DB20819AAXX 12861-12980

2P 3DB20821AAXX 13127-13246

15 420-475 1 3DB20822AAXX 14500-14724

1P 3DB20824AAXX 14920-15144

420 2 3DB20823AAXX 14710-14941

2P 3DB20825AAXX 15130-15361

490 1 3DB20826AAXX 14400-14635

1P 3DB20828AAXX 14890-15125

2 3DB20827AAXX 14625-14860

2P 3DB20829AAXX 15115-15350

18 1560 1 3DB20864AAXX 17700-18140

1P 3DB20865AAXX 19260-19700

1008-1010 1 3DB20860AAXX 17700-18201

1P 3DB20862AAXX 18710-19211

2 3DB20861AAXX 18180-18690

2P 3DB20863AAXX 19190-19700

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 154/308

23 1200-1232 1 3DB20834AAXX 21198-21819

1P 3DB20836AAXX 22400-23019

1050-1200-1232 2 3DB20835AAXX 21781-22400

2P 3DB20837AAXX 22981-23600

1008 1 3DB20830AAXX 22000-22315

1P 3DB20832AAXX 23008-23323

2 3DB20831AAXX 22300-22600

2P 3DB20833AAXX 23308-23608

25 1008 1 3DB20854AAXX 24540-24997

1P 3DB20856AAXX 25548-26005

2 3DB20855AAXX 24994-25448

2P 3DB20857AAXX 26002-26456

38 1260 1 3DB20870AAXX 37050-37620

1P 3DB20872AAXX 38310-38880

2 3DB20871AAXX 37619-38180

2P 3DB20873AAXX 38879-39440

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 55/308

2.7.5 MPT-HC/MPT-MC with external diplexer (7/8 GHz)

The diplexer included in the available BRANCHING assemblies refers to ITU–R F.385, 386 and RF special CUSTOMERS channelling with Tx/Rx separation specified in following Table 10. and Table 13. Each diplexer is a 3-port passive device with two band–pass filters as described hereafter.

Each BRANCHING assembly has two different variants by duplex spacing, depending on the RF_Tx out-put frequency band as described on the table below:

3DB Variant Channel

3DB xxxxx AAXX 1_1p

3DB xxxxx ABXX 2_2p

The arrangement between each filters on the same branching device is described below:

WARNING: f1, f2, f3 and f4 frequencies of the branching filters refer to the extreme channel frequencies and not to the cut–off frequencies of the filters.

Table 8. 7 GHz MPT-MC codes with external diplexer

Table 9. 7 GHz MPT-HC codes with external diplexer


7/8 NA Lower 3DB20858AAXX 7107 - 8370

Upper 3DB20859AAXX 7261 - 8496


7/8 NA Lower 3DB20454ADXX 7107 - 8370

Upper 3DB20456ADXX 7261 - 8496

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 156/308

Table 10. 7 GHz Branching assemblies (for MPT-HC and MPT-MC)

154 7212,0 7107,0 7163,0 7261,0 7317,0 3DB 10060 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH. 154_C MHz

154 7547,0 7428,0 7512,0 7582,0 7666,0 3DB 06774 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH. 154_A MHz

154 7603,0 7484,0 7568,0 7638,0 7722,0 3DB 06774 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH. 154_A MHz

154 7561,0 7442,0 7526,0 7596,0 7680,03DB 06775 AAXX

... CH1–1P P.SH.154_B MHz

160 7561,0 7442,0 7520,0 7602,0 7680,0 ... CH1–1P P.SH.160 MHz

154 7617,0 7498,0 7582,0 7652,0 7736,03DB 06775 ABXX

... CH2–2P P.SH.154_B MHz

160 7617,0 7498,0 7576,0 7658,0 7736,0 ... CH2–2P P.SH.160 MHz

161 7240,0 7124,5 7194,5 7285,5 7355,5 3DB 06780 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_A MHz

161 7310,0 7194,5 7264,5 7355,5 7425,5 3DB 06780 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_A MHz

161 7365,0 7249,5 7319,5 7410,5 7480,5 3DB 06781 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_B MHz

161 7435,0 7319,5 7389,5 7480,5 7550,5 3DB 06781 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_B MHz

161 7390,0 7274,5 7344,5 7435,5 7505,5 3DB 06782 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_C MHz

161 7460,0 7344,5 7414,5 7505,5 7575,5 3DB 06782 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_C MHz

161 7540,0 7424,5 7494,5 7585,5 7655,5 3DB 06783 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_D MHz

161 7610,0 7494,5 7564,5 7655,5 7725,5 3DB 06783 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_D MHz

161 7665,0 7549,5 7619,5 7710,5 7780,5 3DB 06784 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_E MHz

161 7735,0 7619,5 7689,5 7780,5 7850,5 3DB 06784 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_E MHz

161 7690,0 7574,5 7644,5 7735,5 7805,5 3DB 06785 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_F MHz

161 7760,0 7644,5 7714,5 7805,5 7875,5 3DB 06785 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_F MHz

168 7299,0 7187,0 7243,0 7355,0 7411,0 3DB 10059 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.168_B MHZ

168 7569,0 7443,0 7527,0 7611,0 7695,0 3DB 06776 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.168 MHZ

168 7625,0 7499,0 7583,0 7667,0 7751,0 3DB 06776 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.168 MHZ







N.B. Shifter value choice to be done by Craft Terminal.

Shifter MHz

Central Freq. MHz

Filter 1 MHz (Lower Band)

Filter 2 MHz(Upper Band) BRANCHING ASSEMBLY

Low Limit f1

High Limit f2

Low Limit f3

High Limit f4 APR codes Technical Description

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 57/308

Table 11. 8 GHz MPT-MC codes with external diplexer

Table 12. 8 GHz MPT-HC codes with external diplexer

Table 13. 8 GHz Branching assemblies (for MPT-HC and MPT-MC)

119 8366.5 8286.0 8328.0 8405.0 8447.03DB 06789 AAXX

... CH1–1P P.SH.119 MHz

126 8366.5 8282.5 8324.5 8408.5 8450.5 ... CH1–1P P.SH.126 MHz

119 8408.5 8328.0 8370.0 8447.0 8489.03DB 06789 ABXX

... CH2–2P P.SH.119 MHz

126 8408.5 8324.5 8366.5 8450.5 8492.5 ... CH2–2P P.SH.126 MHz

151.614 8315.010 8204.217 8274.189 8355.831 8425.803 3DB 06787 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.151 MHz

151.614 8384.982 8274.189 8344.161 8425.803 8495.775 3DB 06787 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.151 MHz

208 8217.0 8064.0 8162.0 8272.0 8370.0 3DB 10073 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.208 MHZ

208 8301.0 8148.0 8246.0 8356.0 8454.0 3DB 10073 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.208 MHZ

266 8097.5 7905.0 8024.0 8171.0 8290.0 3DB 06788 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.266 MHZ

266 8209.5 8017.0 8136.0 8283.0 8402.0 3DB 06788 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.266 MHZ

294.440

7947.835

7749.755

7851.475 8044.195

8145.915

3DB 06786 AAXX ... CH1–1PP.SH.294/305/311 MHZ305.560 7738.635 8157.035

311.320 7732.875 8162.795

311.320 8066.435 7851.475

7970.075

8162.795 8281.395

3DB 06786 ABXX ... CH2–2PP.SH.294/305/311 MHZ294.440

8063.7407862.965

8157.4058264.515

305.560 7851.845 8275.635

213.5 8147.0 8035.0 8046.0 8248.0 8259.0 3DB 10103 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH. 213.5 MHZ


7/8 NA Lower 3DB20858AAXX 7107 - 8370

Upper 3DB20859AAXX 7261 - 8496


7/8 NA Lower 3DB20454ADXX 7107 - 8370

Upper 3DB20456ADXX 7261 - 8496

Shifter MHz

Central Freq. MHz

Filter 1 MHz (Lower Band)

Filter 2 MHz(Upper Band)

BRANCHING ASSEMBLY

Low Limit f1

High Limit f2

Low Limit f3

High Limit f4 APR codes Technical Description

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 158/308

2.8 Functional description

2.8.1 MSS-1c (Indoor Unit)

The MSS-1c incorporates the base–band processing and also radio interface functionalities only when MPT-HC or MPT-MC is connected. MSS-1c offers tributaries interfaces as well as supervision.

The MSS-1c radio is frequency–independent.

MSS-1c

PFoE

ETHERNETSWITCH

4x10/100/1000Ethernet ports

LIU IWF8

2

HK (*)

8E1

2E1

E1 INTERFACEMPT1 (optical interface)

MPT2 (optical interface)

MPT1 (electrical interf.)

MPT2 (electrical interf.)

Powersupply

LIGHTINGPROTECTION PSU

FPGA

FAN unit connector

LCT RJ45NMS1 RJ45

RA

DIO

INTE

RFA

CE

NMS2 RJ45

(*)

(*)

Figure 14. MSS-1c block diagram

(*) Not supported in the current release.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 59/308

Optical SFP tobe installed toconnect oneMPT-HC

(*)

E1 Connector (9-10)

E1 Connector (1-8)

User Ethernet ports (3-4) (Note 1)

User Ethernet ports (1-2)

RJ45 CTconnector

RJ45 HouseKeeping connector (*)

(*)RJ45 NMS2connector

RJ45 NMS1connector

RJ45 connector to MPT1

(MPT-HC or MPT-MC)

6 LEDs (Note 2)

Power supplyconnector

Figure 15. MSS-1c front view

(*) Not supported in the current release.

To power supply the FAN unit, if installed.

Figure 16. MSS-1c rear view

Note 1: To use the User Ethernet Ports 3 and 4 an SFP plug-in (electrical or optical) must be installed.

Note 2: The meaning of the six LEDs is: – LED M: Major Alarm (red)– LED m: Minor Alarm (red) (not supported in the current release: permanently OFF)– LED W: Warning (yellow) (not supported in the current release: permanently OFF)– LED A: Abnormal condition (yellow)– LED MPT1: MPT Status (green/red/yellow)– LED MPT2: not supportedLED A is ON in the following conditions:– Tx Power muted by operator– ACM frozen by operator– MPT loopback activeLED MPT1 can be:– GREEN: MPT is emitting power as expected according the known configuration– YELLOW: MPT is not emitting power due to a forced Squelch condition– RED: MPT is ABNORMALLY emitting power– SWITCHED OFF: MPT is not emitting power according with the known configurationAt start-up the MSS-1c:– lights on all the alarm LEDs (Major, Minor, Warning and Abnormal)– lights on the MPT LED as yellow, then this LED will be GREEN, RED or YELLOW, as

explained above.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 160/308

2.8.1.1 External User Interface

– 2 traffic 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces for data and service traffic via RJ45 connector.

– 2 SFP ready to accept optical 1000Base-LX/SX SFP or Electrical 1000Base-T SFP.

– 2x 10/100 Ethernet NMS interfaces for connection of TMN on RJ45 connector

– 1 Local Craft terminal interface 10/100 Ethernet allows the straight connection to MPT remote Con-troller via RJ45 connector

– 10 E1 bi-directional interfaces on 2 subD connectors

– 4 In housekeeping for external alarms collections, RJ45 connector + 2 IN/OUT (not supported)

– 9 poles SubD Connector in the rear side for FAN unit feed/control.

2.8.1.2 Power supply

The MSS-1c receives the Battery input through 1 power connector mounted on the front panel.

The input voltage range is from -38.4 V to -57.6 Vdc.

2.8.1.3 Ethernet switch

The switch provides the following features:

– Address learning up to 8K Mac address and static entries,

– Standard 802.1Q management (VLAN),

– Layer2 switching (MAC Address),

– 2 QoS per port (802.1P and DiffServ)

– Flexible output scheduler: SP (strict priority), DWRR (deficit weighted round robin).

2.8.1.4 E1 Interface

The E1 Interface performs the following macro functions:

– Termination of 10 E1 signals (10 E1 bi-directional interfaces according ITU-T G.703 on the front panel)

– Encapsulation/Extraction of those PDH data flows into/from standard Ethernet packets Inter Working Function

– Reconstruction of the original PDH Timing meeting G823/824 Req.

– Sending/getting those std Ethernet packets to the Ethernet switch

– Communication with the Controller for provisioning and status report.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 61/308

2.8.1.5 MPT Interface

The MPT Interface is the interface for one MPT: MPT-HC or MPT-MC.

The connection to the MPT-HC or MPT-MC can be realized by using:

– only one electrical Ethernet cable with the PFoE (Power Feed over Ethernet) function (Ethernet traf-fic + Power Supply on the same cable) (For the MPT-HC the DC Extractor must be used).

The connection to the MPT-HC can also be realised by using:

– 1 cable (electrical/optical Ethernet) + 1 cable for the Power Supply.

Main Functions

– Provide the power supply interface and the Ethernet interface

– Provide the Power Feed over Ethernet function

– Lightning and surge protection

– Ethernet and power interface supervision

– Clock distribution function

– Ethernet link quality monitor function

– Communication with Controller for provisioning and status report.

2.8.1.6 Ethernet User Interface

The following 4 Ethernet User Interfaces are available:

– 2 traffic 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces for data and service traffic via RJ45 connector.

– 2 SFP ready to accept optical 1000Base-LX/SX SFP or Electrical 1000Base-T SFP.

The User port 2 and port 4 (in Optical mode) can be used as SynchE synchronization.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 162/308

2.8.2 Fan unit

An optional Fan unit must be used to dissipate the MSS-1c in special case when the ambient temperature is > +50°C.

Figure 17. shows the installation position: the MSS-1c on the right and the Fan unit on the left.

The MSS-1c and the Fan unit are mounted on a bracket compatible with 19" rack. Height is 1.3U.

The Fan unit is powered by the MSS-1c with a cable placed on the rear side. The cable is provided with the Fan unit.

The Fan unit includes two fans.

One bi-color LED on the front panel gives the status of the Fan unit:

– Fans alarm = OFF <-> LED = green

– Fans alarm = ON <-> LED = red

Figure 17. MSS-1c and Fan unit

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 63/308

2.8.3 MPT-HC

MPT-HC (Microwave Packet Transport) is a Microwave Equipment capable to transport the Ethernet traf-fic over an RF radio channel.

The MPT-HC includes a waveguide antenna port, a type-N female connector for the DC connection, a maintenance connector (with captive protection cap) for RSSI access, 1 electrical or optical GE interface and a grounding stud.

N.B. The 1 GE interface for RPS is not used.

The MPT-HC can be installed on an integrated antenna or on standard poles, wall or pedestal mount, with an appropriate fastening system.

The MPT-HC (with a solar shield) incorporates the complete RF transceiver and can be associated with an integrated or separate antenna.

The cabinet is a very compact and robust weatherproof (IP 67) container, designed to be compatible with hot and very sunny climatic zones.

The MPT-HC can be rapidly installed on standard poles with an appropriate fastening system. The pole mounting is the same from 6 to 38 GHz.

The MPT-HC is fixed by means of quick latches. This system allows to change the MPT-HC without alter-ing antenna pointing.

For 6 GHz & 7/8 GHz, the MPT-HC polarization is determined by the rotation of the MPT-HC in 1+0 con-figuration.

For 11 GHz to 38 GHz, the MPT-HC polarization is determined by the rotation of the polarization rotator fitted in the antenna port of the MPT-HC in 1+0 configuration.

Three mechanical solutions are adopted:

[1] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation (11 GHz to 38 GHz), where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-HC cabinet; this type of MPT-HC is identified by one Logistical Item only;

[2] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation and different mechanics from 11-38 GHz (6 GHz), where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-HC cabinet; this type of MPT-HC is identified by one Logistical Item only;

[3] with external diplexer: due to a very high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of the shifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), where MPT-HC is composed by two independent units: the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the RF section); each of this type of MPT-HC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly and another for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 164/308

MPT-HC is broken down to the following sections:

– MPT-CB: Common Belt section. This section is Frequency independent, and all the features relevant to this unit are common to all the MPT RF options.

– MPT-RF: Radio Frequency section that is frequency dependent.

Figure 18. MPT system

The MPT-HC interface is based on a Gb Ethernet, that can be either optical or electrical depending on the needs and the cable length. If the optical port has/have to be used (data and/or RPS port), the cor-responfing SFP plug-in must be installed by opening the Cobox.

N.B. In the current release the RPS port is not used.

Figure 19. 11-38 GHz MPT-HC housing

Figure 20. 6 GHz MPT-HC housing

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 65/308

Figure 21. 7-8 GHz MPT-HC housing

2.8.3.1 MPT-HC block diagram

Figure 22. MPT-HC block diagram

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 166/308

2.8.3.1.1 Common Belt section

The Common Belt section is frequency independent. It is the digital section of the MPT-HC.

The main functions are the following:

1) Interfaces the MSS for traffic transport and MSS communication messages in both directions, through one Gigabit Ethernet optical or electrical cable.

2) Micro-Processor for

– Indoor - MPT-HC dialogue – HW configuration and monitoring of all MPT-HC parts– Dynamic regulation process such as ATPC

3) Transport of the system reference clock (synchronisation)

4) Switches the traffic and management to the correct port (processor port, radio port)

5) Performs traffic adaptation if needed

6) Performs Quality of Service and policing on flow to be sent over the radio link.

7) Modulation and demodulation of the resulting modem frame

Power supply interface

It is provided by a "N" 50 ohms connector, with the positive to ground.

The power supply is coming from the MSS in the range of -40,5 V to -58 V. MPT-HC input voltage range is from -28 V to -58 V.

Lightning protection

The lightning protection is internal to the MPT-HC. No external protection must be used.

This protection applies to:

– the Ethernet electrical cables

– the power supply coax cable

INCA module

The INCA module hosts the physical electrical Ethernet interface.

Tx Side

Following the flow from user Ethernet port to radio, the section performs:

– Reception of incoming Ethernet frames from the optical or electrical user interface (through INCA)

– Recovery of the clock coming from the MSS

– Switch of the management frames from user port to internal processor

– Generation of MPT-HC to MPT-HC messages needed for radio link (ATPC, ACM, ...)

– Compression of the TDMoEth frames header (TDM2TDM - MEF8, TDM2ETH - MEF8)

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 67/308

– Management of the Quality of Service

– Fragmentation of the Ethernet frames

– Shaping of the traffic to adapt it to radio bandwidth

– Tx Modem frame building

– Tx Radio frame building (FEC, pilots, ...)

– Synchronisation of the symbol rate to the MSS recovered clock

– Modulation in I and Q analogue signals to be sent to the RF section.

Rx Side

Following the flow from radio to user Ethernet port, the section performs:

– Reception of the I and Q analogue signals coming from the RF section

– Demodulation of the Rx radio frame into Rx modem frame

– Deframing of the Rx modem frame

– Re-assembly of fragmented Ethernet frame

– Decompression of TDMoEth frames header

– Extraction of MPT-HC to MPT-HC messages needed for radio link (ATPC, ACM, ...)

– Management of service channels frames

– Switch of the management frames from internal processor to user port.

– Send the recovered clock to the MSS

2.8.3.1.2 RF Section

There are two architectures, the difference between these two architectures are only on Rx side:

– For the first one (used in MPT-HC band 7/8 GHz) there are only two frequency conversions between RF input frequency and base band frequency

– For the second one (used for all other MPT-HC bands) there are three frequency conversions

The block diagrams of these two architectures are shown hereafter.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 168/308

Figure 23. 7/8 GHz MPT-HC architecture

Figure 24. 11 to 38 GHz MPT-HC architecture

Main Functions

1. TX block:

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 69/308

• IF TX Quadrature modulator

• IF_Tx Synthesizer

• RF Up-Converter

• Output power management

2. Tx_Rx Common block:

• RF_LO Synthesizer

3. Rx block:

• LNA

• RF Down Converter

• First IF amplification and overload management

• First IF down conversion

• Second IF amplification and filtering (not present in 7/8 GHz)

• Quadrature demodulator

• Base band filter and AGC loop

Tx Side

I Q Base Band and TX_IF

The two inputs (I and Q), coming from the Common Belt section, are filtered in two seven poles butterworth low-pass filters to attenuate high frequency components of the base band signal. Depending of channel bandwidth it is possible to select two different filters with cut-off frequency of 13.8MHz or 61.5 MHz.

An integrated I Q modulator is used to combine the two output signals of the filters with the IF output signal TX_IF_LO to obtain modulated carrier.

TX_IF_LO signal is a low phase noise signal generated with an integrated Synthesizer in the frequency range 1650 -2200 MHz with a step of 250 KHz.

An amplifier and an additional low pass filter at the end of IF TX stage permit to obtain correct level and low-level harmonics at the input of the Tx RF mixer.

TX_RF

The Tx IF signal is up converted in an RF mixer to obtain the correct RF output frequency range.

The RF LO used by the mixer is obtained by the multiplication of the output signal of an RF synthesizer.

The output signal of the mixer is filtered before to enter in the RF AGC loop including variable attenuators, amplifiers and power detector. This AGC loop is controlled to obtain the specified output level power range.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 170/308

Rx Side

RX_RF

The input signal is amplified in a low noise variable gain amplifier, after there is a down-converter stage that translates the input signal to the first IF frequency.

The local oscillator used for the translation is the same phase locked RF synthesizer that is used for Tx up-conversion.

Frequency range of first IF is in the range 2 to 3.5 GHz.

RX_IF

At the input of Rx_IF stage there is a variable attenuator used to attenuate the RX_IF level in case of over-load input level to prevent intermodulation of the next stages.

After the variable attenuator there is a power level detector used to manage RF Gain and RX IF attenuator in function of total power in large bandwidth.

After there is a second down conversion stage (not used in 7/8 GHz) that permit to translate the frequency to a fixed IF of 1080 MHz (13 and 15 GHz MPT-HC case) or 840 MHz (18 to 38 GHz MPT-HC case).

The RX_IF LO used for IF translation is generated with an integrated synthesizer in the frequency range 3300 to 4400 MHz with 500 KHz or 2000 KHz step.

N.B. In 7/8 GHz MPT-HC the RF input is directly converted to fixed IF of 2100 MHz after the first RX RF mixer.

This fixed IF is filtered in a pass-band Filter to improve carrier to noise ratio and interferer protection of the next high gain stage.

RX Base band

The fixed IF is transposed to a base band signal with an IQ quadrature demodulator.

This demodulator used the RX_BB_LO signal of an integrated synthesizer, the center frequency of this synthesizer is: 1900 (6, 7/8GHz ODU) / 2140 MHz (7/8 GHz ODU), 1080 MHz (11 to15 GHz RF) or 840 MHz (18 to 38 GHz RF).

After each I Q outputs of the demodulator there is four switchable low-pass butterworth filters that are cho-sen in function of bit rate modulation (Anti-aliasing Rx filter).

At the end of the base band stage on each I Q channel there is a variable gain amplifier controlled by the PWM signals coming from the Common Belt section.

This AGC loop permits to have a constant level at the Rx Base band output.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 71/308

2.8.3.2 RSSI Monitoring Point

The RSSI is available on a connector used to manually point the antenna on the field.

The higher the voltage the higher RSSI and better aligned the antenna is. To measure the RSL is used a voltmeter connected to the MPT by using a service kit cable.

Table 14. RSSI Table

Units Measurement (with MPT-HC)

Service kit cable (Vdc)

5 4.71 4.12 3.5 2.9 2.3 1.71 1.11 0.59 0.14

RSL (dBm) -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100

2.8.3.3 Waveguide Flange Data

Table 15. Waveguide Flange Data

Waveguide Type

L6 GHz

U6GHz

7 GHz

8 GHz

11 GHz

13 GHz

15 GHz

18 GHz

23 GHz

26 GHz

38 GHz

WR137 WR137 WR113 WR113 WR75 WR62 WR62 WR42 WR42 WR42 WR28

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 172/308

2.8.4 Power Extractor

The Power Extractor is an Outdoor Device, to be installed close to the MPT-HC, which receives on one cable the “Power Feed over Ethernet” (Ethernet traffic and Power Supply), provided by the Power Injector, and separates the Power Supply from the Ethernet traffic to be separately sent to the MPT-HC.

Figure 25. shows the Power Extractor.

Figure 25. Power Extractor

The Power Extractor has 3 connectors:

– DC+DATA In (PFoE from the Power Injector)

– DC Out (Power Supply to MPT-HC)

– Data Out (Ethernet traffic to MPT-HC)

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 73/308

2.8.5 MPT-MC

MPT-MC is similar to MPT-HC from architecture standpoint. MPT-MC has limited capacity vs MPT-HC and is natively Ethernet powered (no Power Extractor is required).

Two mechanical solutions are adopted:

[1] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation (6 GHz and from 11 GHz to 38 GHz), where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-MC cabinet; this type of MPT-MC is identified by one Logistical Item only;

[2] with external diplexer: due to a vary high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of the shifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), where MPT-MC is composed by two independent units: the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the RF section); each of this type of MPT-MC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly and another for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

Figure 26. 6 GHz and from 11 to 38 GHz MPT-MC housing

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 174/308

Figure 27. 7-8 GHz MPT-MC housing

2.8.6 Radio Transmission Features with MPT-HC/MPT-MC

2.8.6.1 Frequency Agility

The Frequency Agility feature gives the Operator the possibility to set via MCT the frequency of a single Transceiver within a chosen sub–band to select the RF working channel. This implies benefits for spare parts, order processing and frequency co–ordination.

2.8.6.2 Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC)

The Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) function automatically increases or decreases the trans-mit output power upon request from the opposite terminal. The opposite terminal constantly monitors Receive Signal Level (RSL), receive signal quality, and aggregate Bit Error Rate (BER) of the receive sig-nal.

When the ATPC is Enabled the transmit output will remain at it's lowest level until a fade occurs (or a receive circuit alarm is detected). When the change in RSL is detected at the receive end, a command is sent to the transmit end to increase power in 1 dB steps to it's highest level. After the fade is over, the receive end commands the transmit power to decreases in 1 dB steps to the lowest level.

The ATPC range (high and low limits) is variable, determined by link distance, link location, and link fre-quency. When ATPC Enabled is checked, the range values are shown in parenthesis (minimum - maxi-mum) following ATPC Range.

When the ATPC is disabled the transmit output will always operate at the power value set by the MCT.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 75/308

2.8.6.3 Transmitted power control: RTPC function

The capability to adjust the transmitted power in a static and fixed way (RTPC = Remote Transmit Power Control) has been introduced for those countries where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which due to the short length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred. The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band involved. The setting of the transmitted power can be performed locally through MCT.

The Output power is band and modulation dependent.

2.8.6.4 Power Monitoring

The MPT-HC incorporates a detector for Tx power measurement. It is used to provide measurement of forward power as a performance parameter, and to provide a calibration input for transmitter operation over temperature and output range.

Viewed Tx power ranges always match the capabilities of the MPT-HC for a given modulation. When modulation is changed, the CT automatically adjusts/restricts Tx Power to be within valid range.

2.8.6.5 Adaptive Equalization

Adaptive equalization (AE) is employed to improve reliability of operation under dispersive fade conditions, typically encountered over long and difficult paths.

This is achieved through a multi-tap equalizer consisting of two registers, one with feed-forward taps, the other with feed-back taps. Each of these registers multiply successive delayed samples of the received signal by weighting-coefficients to remove propagation induced inter-symbol interference.

2.8.6.6 Link identifier

The amount of microwave links, especially in urban areas puts the problem of possible interferences during installation and turn-on phase.

The digital frame incorporates link identity coding capabilities to prevent the capture of an unwanted signal.

In case of “Link Identifier Mismatch” all the traffic is dropped.

The Link identifier management can be enabled or disabled by the management systems.

2.8.6.7 Loopbacks

To facilitate the installation/commissioning and the remote maintenance two loopbacks are available.

As the activation of a loopback affects the traffic, the presence of a loopback is indicated to the management systems as an abnormal condition.

The supported loopbacks are shown in the following figure.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 176/308

Figure 28. Available loopbacks

The following loopbacks are provided by the MPT-HC or MPT-MC:

1) Line Side loopback: this loopback routes data from the output of the Tx Data Awareness block (after compression) to the input of the Rx data awareness (decompression). This is an internal loopback. It is a Loop and Continue. It is possible to enable this loopback only at aggregate level. When this loopback is activated the behavior is the following:

– TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are forwarded back to MSS-1c with source and desti-nation MAC address swapped. For TDM2ETH flows the loopback works only if the ECID Tx and ECID Rx are the same. In case of ECID Tx different from ECID Rx the loopback doesn't work.

– Generic Ethernet flows are dropped. (This includes the ETH2ETH flows).

2) Radio facing loopback: remote loopback allows an over-the-air loopback test to be performed when the modem is operating in a continuous mode. This is a line external loopback and connects the Receive data interface to the Transmit data interface. This loopback is a Loop and Continue. It is possible to enable this loopback only at aggregate level. When this loop is enabled the expected behavior is the following:

– TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are looped back with source and destination MAC address swapped. For TDM2ETH flows the loopback works only if the ECID Tx and ECID Rx are the same. In case of ECID Tx different from ECID Rx the loopback doesn't work.

– Generic Ethernet flows are dropped. (This includes the ETH2ETH flows).

2.8.6.8 Loopback activation

The loopback can be activated by each management system (local or remote). The activation command permits to define the duration of the loopback (time-out).

The time-out period starts at the activation time and expires at the end of the period spontaneously in the NE, a part for the case in which another reconfiguration of the time-out period is requested at the operator interface during the activation time. In this case, if the loopback point is still active because the activation time-out is not expired yet, the time-out period is reconfigurable and the specified time range starts again from the new updated activation date, overwriting the previous activation date and time-out values.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 77/308

2.8.6.9 Loopback life time

In order to avoid the risk of a permanent disconnection from MCT/NMS of a remote NE after the execution of a loopback, a time-out mechanism is supported.

The management system's operator has to provide the time range of the loopback time-out period expressed in hours/minutes starting from the time of the loopback activation.

A default time-out period may be suggested at the operator interface, even if it could be modified on user-needs basis.

After the NE reset, the activation of each loopback point is lost and must be recreated again if needed, starting with a new time-out period.

2.8.7 TMN communication channels

On 9500 MPR Network Element three types of TMN communication channels are present:

– 2 NMS interfaces through the use of VLANs 4085 and 4086 and 2 dedicated RJ45 ports.

– In-band TMN through the use of any USER port requiring the activation of a user defined VLAN

– TMN-RF allowing the management of a remote NE through radio.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 178/308

2.8.8 Traffic profiles

Three kinds of traffic profiles have been identified:

– TDM2TDM (9500 MPR ⇔ 9500 MPR, internal to an MPR network)

– TDM2Eth (9500 MPR ⇔ TDM to Ethernet)

– DATA (Ethernet to Ethernet)

The first two profiles meet MEF8 standard.

Terminal 1Terminal 2

Figure 29. Traffic profiles

Case 1

The E1 stream is inserted in Terminal 1 and extracted in Terminal 2. In this case the two IWFs used to packetize the traffic for the Ethernet switch in the MSS-1c are both internal to the 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2TDM in Terminal 1 and Terminal 2. The Cross connections to be implemented are PDH-Radio type.

Case 2

The E1 stream is inserted in Terminal 1 and extracted in Terminal 2. One IWF is inside the 9500 MPR, but the second IWF is external to the 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2ETH in Terminal 1 and Terminal 2. The Cross connections to be implemented are PDH-Radio type in Terminal 1 and Radio-Eth type in Terminal 2.

Case 3

The E1 stream is inserted/extracted in Terminal 1. One IWF is inside the 9500 MPR, but the second IWF is external to the 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2ETH in Terminal 1 and Terminal 2. The Cross connections to be implemented are PDH-Eth type in Terminal 1.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 79/308

Figure 30. Traffic profiles

Case 4 and 5

In these cases Ethernet packets enter Terminal 1 and are extracted in Terminal 2. In case 4 the Ethernet packets encapsulate the E1 stream; in case 5 the packets are native Ethernet packets. None of the IWFs belongs to the 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is ETH2ETH in Terminal 1 and Terminal 2. No Cross connections must be implemented. The path is automatically implemented with the standard auto-learning algorithm of the 9500 MPR Ethernet switch.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 180/308

2.8.8.1 TDM2TDM

E1 traffic packetized only internally to 9500 MPR equipment.

Figure 31. E1 Traffic

Flow Id present (user defined)

Intermediate node configuration (E1 provisioning):

– node by node (building Cross-connection tables based on Flow Id)

Bandwidth guaranteed (according to QoS → Highest Queue Priority association)

No flooding-autolearning necessary

Both the IWFs belong to 9500 MPR and the packets are not supposed to exit the 9500 MPR network.

The IWF parameters listed above, have predetermined values and don’t need to be provisioned.

– Mac addresses are determined as consequences of the cross connections.

– Payload size is fixed to 121 bytes

– ECID will be the same value as Flow Id (ECID = Emulated Circuit Identifier)

– TDM clock source: clock recovery differential, node timing

– Flow Id provisioned by MCT/NMS

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 81/308

2.8.8.2 TDM2Eth

E1 traffic both internal and external to 9500 MPR equipment.


Flow Id present (user defined)

All the parameters must be configured compliant with the MEF8 standard

Adaptive or differential clock recovery supported

Bandwidth guaranteed (according to QoS → Highest Queue Priority association)

Destination MAC added before going into whole network (MEF8 compliant)

Only one of the IWFs belongs to 9500 MPR and the packets are supposed to exit the 9500 MPR network.

– MAC addresses: in all involved nodes are determined as consequences of the cross connections; the only exception is the Ethernet Terminal Node (the node where the TDM2ETH traffic goes through an user Ethernet port). In such ETN the source address is the node Mac address, the destination Mac address will be provisioned by MCT/NMS.

– Payload size: is fixed to 256 bytes

– ECID: provisioned by MCT/NMS, 2 different values may be used for each direction (ECID = Emulated Circuit Identifier)

– TDM clock source is provisioned by MCT/NMS: clock recovery adaptive, clock recovery differential

– Flow Id is provisioned by MCT/NMS (One VLAN is assigned to each bi-directional circuit emulated E1 flow)

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 182/308

2.8.8.3 ETH2ETH

None of the IWFs belongs to 9500 MPR.

None of the parameters listed in the previous slide has to be configured (the 9500 MPR is transparent).


User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 83/308

2.8.9 Ethernet Traffic Management

The Ethernet traffic is all the traffic entered the MPR network from user Ethernet ports.

By MCT/NMS it is possible to define the way to manage the Ethernet traffic according to one of the following options:

– 802.1D (MAC Address bridge)

– 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge).

2.8.9.1 Bridge type change

In case of change of the bridge type from 802.1Q to 802.1D, a new configuration file must be sent to the NE (or an old file can be used).

2.8.9.2 Reserved Multicast Addresses

The following table summarizes the actions taken for specific reserved multicast addresses. Frames identified with these destination addresses are handled uniquely since they are designed for Layer 2 Control Protocols.

The actions taken by the system can be:

– Discard - The system discards all ingress Ethernet frames and must not generate any egress Ether-net Frame carrying the reserved multicast address.

– Forward - The system accepts all ingress Ethernet frames as standard multicast frames and for-wards them accordingly.

– Peer - The system acts as a peer of the connected device in the operation of the relevant Layer 2 Control Protocol.

Reserved Multicast Address

Function Action

01-80-C2-00-00-00 Bridge Group Address Discard

01-80-C2-00-00-02 Clause 43 (Link Aggregation) and Clause 57 (OAM) of IEEE 802.3

Discard

01-80-C2-00-00-03 IEEE 802.1X PAE address Discard

01-80-C2-00-00-04 - 01-80-C2-00-00-0D

Reserved for future standardization Discard

01-80-C2-00-00-0E IEEE 802.1AB LLDP multicast address Discard

01-80-C2-00-00-0F Reserved for future standardization Discard

01-80-C2-00-00-10 All LANs Bridge Management Group Address Forward

01-80-C2-00-00-11 - 01-80-C2-00-00-1F

Reserved Forward

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 184/308

2.8.10 Quality Of Services (QoS)

The QoS function inside 9500 MPR is the result of a distributed implementation in the MSS-1c switch and MPT. Both those QoS functions are properly configured in order to get the wished behavior on Ethernet flows that will be transmitted.

2.8.10.1 QoS in the MSS-1c

The figure shows an overview of the QoS implementation inside the switch.

Figure 34. QoS in the MSS-1c

The Quality of Service feature of the Ethernet switch provides 4 internal queues per port to support different traffic priorities. Typically the high-priority traffic experiences less delay than that low-priority in the switch under congested conditions.

For each egress port according to method of QoS classification configured in the switch, the packets are assigned to each queue.

TDM flows classification

01-80-C2-00-00-20 GMRP Address (Clause 10 of IEEE 802.1D) Forward

01-80-C2-00-00-21 GVRP Address (IEEE 802.1Q) Forward

01-80-C2-00-00-22 - 01-80-C2-00-00-2F

Reserved for GARP Application Forward

01-80-C2-00-00-30 - 01-80-C2-00-00-3F

CCM and LTM Group Destination MAC Addresses (IEEE 802.1ag)

Forward

Reserved Multicast Address

Function Action

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 85/308

All the TDM traffic flows will be assigned to the highest egress priority queue (Q4).

Ethernet flows classification

For generic Ethernet flows in the switch the priority of each packet can be assigned according to the information in:

– IEEE 802.1p (the switch must be configured to 802.1Q): the packet is examined for the presence of a valid 802.1P user-priority tag. If the tag is present the correspondent priority is assigned to the packet

802.1P priority Queue

110, 111 Q3 (high priority)

100, 101 Q2

000, 001, 010, 011 Q1

– DiffServ (the switch must be configured to 802.1D): each packet is classified based on DSCP field in the IP header to determine the priority.

DiffServ priority Queue

111000, 110000, 101110, 101000 Q3 (high priority)

100110, 100100, 100010, 100000011110, 011100, 011010, 011000

Q2

All remaining values Q1

Scheduler

The scheduler algorithm cannot be configured. HQP scheduler algorithm is used on queue Q4. Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR) is used on the other queues with the following weights:

QUEUE WEIGHT

Q3 (high priority) 4

Q2 2

Q1 1

QoS with jumbo frame

While there is no physical limitation to the number of ports that can receive jumbo frame, if to many jumbo flows are transmitted toward the same port into two different queues the QoS could work in wrong way. It is recommended to forward jumbo frame only in queue Q1 (lower priority).

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 186/308

2.8.10.2 QoS in the MPT

In the figure is shown an overview of the QoS implementation inside the MPT.

Figure 35. QoS in the MPT

The QoS feature provides eight internal queues to support different traffic priorities. The QoS function can assign the packet to one of the eight egress transmit queues.

– Queue 8 is assigned to TMN

– Queue 7 is assigned to TDM2TDM traffic

– Queue 6 is assigned to TDM2Eth traffic

Queues 1 to 5 are assigned to Ethernet traffic according to the information inside the packet as 802.1p field or DiffServ field.

QoS based on IEEE std. 802.1p

When 802.1p QoS mechanism is adopted, the reference is the standard “IEEE 802.1D-2004 Annex G User priorities and traffic classes” that defines 8 traffic types and the corresponding user priority values.

Considering that in the Radio Interface module for generic Ethernet traffic there are five egress queues the mapping 802.1p value to queue is the following:

802.1p priority Queue

111, 110 Q5 (high priority)

101 Q4

100 Q3

011, 000 Q2

010, 001 Q1

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 87/308

QoS based on DiffServ

DiffServ priority Queue

111000, 110000, 101110, 101000 Q5 (high priority)

100110, 100100, 100010, 100000 Q4

011110, 011100, 011010, 011000 Q3

010110, 010100, 010010, 010000001010, 001100, 001010, 001000, 000000

Q2

All remaining values Q1

Scheduler

HQP scheduler algorithm will be used on Q8, Q7 and Q6.

Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR) algorithm will be used for the other five queues.

By default, the DWRR algorithm is used with the following weights:

Queue Weight

Q5 (higher priority) 16

Q4 8

Q3 4

Q2 2

Q1 1

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 188/308

2.8.11 Cross-connections

Figure 36. Cross-connection

The cross-connections are realized with a Layer-2 Ethernet Switch inside the MSS-1c.

The decision made by the switch to forward the received packet is based on the destination MAC address.

2.8.11.1 E1 Cross-connection

Each E1 can be cross connected independently.

E1 can be cross connected to any of the following ports:

– Radio port (Figure 37)

– Ethernet port (Figure 38)

Each E1 must be associated to a unique signal flow ID.

Figure 37. E1 from/to Radio port

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 89/308

Figure 38. E1 from/to Ethernet port

Typical use of the E1 from/to Ethernet port is in case of two co-located MSS-Access to expand the number of PDH ports for the other radio direction.

N.B. To configure these cross-connections a connected MPT is needed.

2.8.11.2 Ethernet flows

All flows different from the TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH ones are managed as the standard Ethernet packets:

– if the 802.1Q is enabled the related management is performed looking the VLAN and then, according to the destination address, each packet is switched to the correct port: radio, user Ethernet or E1

– if the 802.1Q is not enabled only the destination address is considered to route the packets.

The bandwidth assigned globally to the radio interface to the Ethernet traffic is the consequence, with a given radio capacity, of the number of E1 cross-connected on the radio interface. Hence the available bandwidth for Ethernet flows will be the configured radio bandwidth decreased by the bandwidth used by each TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 190/308

2.8.12 Synchronization

2.8.12.1 Synchronization overview

TDM data flow is fragmented and the fragments are transmitted over a Packet Switched Network (PSN);

The received fragments need to be reassembled in the original TDM data flow at the “original bit rate”

Two main methods can be used to recover at the Rx site, the original bit rate:

– Differential clock recovery with or without the Node timing: recalculation of the original clock based on the time delta with respect to a reference clock that is available at both Tx and Rx site (Differential: used in case of clock distribution on the whole network. It’s more reliable than Adaptive; also used in TDM2TDM traffic (MPR to MPR)). This method can be selected for each E1 stream.

– Adaptive clock recovery with or without the Node timing: based on the average rate at which the packets (fragments) arrive at Rx site (Adaptive: simpler network, but performances depends on the PDV (Packet Delay Variation) in the Network. Always used when the reference clock isn’t distributed on the whole network). This method can be selected for each E1 stream for TDM2Eth only.

In meshed networks (rings) do not close the synchronisation configuration.

2.8.12.1.1 Differential clock recovery

End System1

IWF IWF

End System2

PSNPSN

A common reference clock is available at both Ends.

The IWF system, at Rx side, generates the output clock based on RTP TimeStamps which are sent together with each Fragments.

Note

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 91/308

2.8.12.1.2 Adaptive clock recovery

End System1

IWF IWF

End System2

PSNPSN

A common reference clock is NOT available at both Ends.

The IWF system, at Rx side, generates the output clock based on data arrival rate: TDM clock is slowly adjusted to maintain the average fill level of a jitter buffer at its midpoint.

2.8.12.1.3 Node Timing

The Node Timing is timing from the network clock as defined in G.8261. When it is selected the regen-erated E1 at receiver side is synchronized to the network element clock (NEC). This method can be selected for each E1 stream.

At MSS-1c level, all the “Node Timed” TDM flows:

– will egress the MSS1c with the same clock (the MSS-1c NEC);

– MUST ingress the MSS1c being synchronised by the same clock.

As for any synchronisation clock transmission, the user shall particularly take care to avoid synchronisation loop and TDM traffic hits:

– or the MSS-1c is the master clock and the external equipment must recover its own clock from one of the “node timed” TDM flows and use this recovered clock to generate its TDM flows;

– or the external equipment is the master clock (i.e. it generates all its TDM flows by using its internal clock) and the MSS-1c MUST use one of the “node timed” ingressing TDM flows as clock source for its NEC;

– or both of the MSS1c and external equipment MUST be synchronised by the same clock if this clock comes from another equipment.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 192/308

2.8.12.2 Synchronization interface

Each Network Element must have a reference clock (NEC), which will be distributed to each circuit of the NE. Such clock is a 25 MHz generated in the MSS-1c in the Clock Reference Unit (CRU) function.

The NEC is locked to a Synchronization Source.

The sources can be:

[1] Internal Local Oscillator. It is the clock provided by the Local Oscillator inside the NE

[2] Any E1 available at input traffic interfaces (the specific E1 port has to be chosen)

[3] The Symbol Rate of the Rx signal of the Radio direction

[4] SynchE: Any Synchronous Ethernet clock source available at enabled User Ethernet traffic inter-faces (both electrical and optical) configured in synchronous operation mode (the specific User Ethernet port has to be chosen). From ITU-T G.8264 point of view, the MSS is a Synchronous Ether-net equipment equipped with a system clock (NEC) following the ITU-T G.8262 recommendation. A User Ethernet interface configured in synchronous operation mode can work only at 1 Giga. In the particular case of electrical User Ethernet interfaces, these interfaces perform link auto negotiation to determine the master and slave clocks for the link. The clock slave role must be configured as part of auto negotiation parameters in order to use the interface as Synchronous Ethernet clock source.

Some rules have to be followed while configuring the Primary and Secondary clock sources.

All the NECs have to be configured as Master or Slave.

Only one Master is allowed in the network.

– If Master,

• The Restoration Mode can be Revertive or Not Revertive. If the mode is Revertive, when a failed source becomes available, the switch goes back.

• The Primary sources must be choosen among 2) or 4).

– then Master Secondary Source must be selected among 1), 2) or 4).

– If Slave,

• The Restoration Mode is fixed to Revertive.

• The Primary Source must be choosen between 3) or 4)

• The Secondary Source can be choosen among 1), 2) or 4).

For each available sync source, the CRU detects the signal Degrade Alarm on each available sync source. Such Signal Degrade alarm raises also in case of muted (missing) clock.

The Signal Degraded Alarm relevant to the selected Synchronization Source, or the relevant circuit Fail, causes the switching of the Synchronization Source.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 93/308

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 194/308

3 NE Management by software application

3.1 WebEML start

This chapter explains all the screens of the WebEML, which is started by a double click on the WebEML icon of the PC desktop.

The PC must be connected to the CT port of he MSS-1c.

Refer to paragraph 4.3 - “Software local copy” to get all the information to copy the WebEML from the soft-ware package CD ROM and to connect the PC to the MSS-1c.

1) To start the WebEML double click on the relevant icon on the PC desktop.

2) NETO opens. Insert the IP address of the NE (default: 192.168.30.1) and click OK.

N.B. To access the NE the PC must be configured to “Get automatically an IP address”, because the NE is configured as DHCP Server with default IP address 192.168.30.1 and subnet mask 255.255.255.252. The PC Ethernet port must be connected to the CT connector of the MSS-1c.

N.B. 192.168.30.1 is the IP address of the port from MSS-1c and cannot be modified. The management can be done also by the NMS port, but the PC must be configured with fixed IP and gateway. First open the WebEML and after connect the cable.

Warning: Without the MPT connected to the MSS-1c, it is not possible to open the WebEML on the CT port from MSS-1c.

Warning: If all the WebEML images/icons are missing, check that file msimg32.dll is present in System32.

User Manual

NE Management by software application

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 95/308

3) When the NE is supervised, click Show.

4) The Main view opens.

Figure 39. shows the Main View of an MPT-MC.

The same screen (and same menus) will appear with a connection to an MPT-HC. The only difference is the naming.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 196/308

Tool bar

AlarmSynthesis

Navigator

Generalinformation

Domain Alarm Synthesis Tab-panels

IP address of the connected NE

Connection status

Figure 39. Main view: System Overview

3.2 Tool bar

The Tool bar has 3 buttons:

– Exit: to quit the application

– Connect to NE: to establish the connection to the NE

– Disconnect: to disconnect the NE

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 97/308

3.3 Alarm Synthesis

The WebEML provides an alarm functionality that informs the operator on the severity of the different alarms in the NE as well as on the number of current alarms. There are five different alarm severity levels. In the WebEML these different levels are associated with colors.

– Red: Critical alarm (CRI)

– Orange: Major alarm (MAJ)

– Yellow: Minor alarm (MIN)

– Cyan: Warning alarm (WAR)

– Blue: Indeterminate (IND)

The meaning of the icons in the Alarm Synthesis is:

[1] CRI - Critical alarmSynthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting (typical: NE isolation).

[2] MAJ - Major (Urgent) alarmSynthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting.

[3] MIN - Minor (Not Urgent) alarmSynthesis of alarms for which a deferred intervent can be decided.

[4] WAR - Warning alarmSynthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the network.

[5] IND - Indeterminate alarmSynthesis of alarms not associated with the previous severities. Not operative.

Each alarm severity is represented by an alarm icon situated in the top left hand corner of the view. These alarm icons are constantly represented on the different Equipment views so that the operator is always aware of the alarms occurring in the system.

Furthermore the number in the alarm icon gives the number of active alarms with that specific severity.

3.4 Domain Alarm Synthesis Area

This area contains the icons representing the alarms per domain. Each icon indicates the number of alarm occurrences for each domain.

The meaning of the icons in the Domain alarm synthesis area is:

[1] COM – Communication alarmSynthesis of alarms of the Communication domain.

[2] EQP – Equipment alarmSynthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 198/308

3.5 General Information on the Management State

The different management states concerning the NE are shown in two tab-panels:

– Radio Synthesis

– Network Supervision

The Radio Synthesis gives information on the:

– Abnormal Condition state: indicates whether some abnormal conditions have been recognized.

The Network Supervision gives information on the:

– Local Access state: indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the OS

– OS Supervision state: indicates whether or not the communication with the OS is established.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 99/308

3.6 Navigator area

The Navigator menu depends on the selected function in the upper tab-panels.

Four tab-panels are available:

[1] Commissioning (par. 3.6.1 on page 101)

• Inventory

• Software Download

• Configuration (par. 3.6.1.3 on page 105)

– Date/Time– Site Information– Protection– Radio– Advanced Radio– MSS-1c– Networking

• Backup / Restore

• Monitoring

[2] Performance Monitoring (par. 3.6.2 on page 117)

• Performance History File Upload

• Normalized

• Adaptive Modulation

• Ethernet

• Monitoring

[3] Troubleshooting (par. 3.6.3 on page 126)

• Inventory

• Troubleshooting

• Monitoring

[4] Maintenance (par. 3.6.4 on page 128)

• Inventory

• Software Download

• Configuration > Radio

• Backup / Restore

• Monitoring

The System Overview tab-panel (Figure 39) is the Welcome screen of the WebEML. It is a read-only screen, which shows all the configuration parameters of the MPT.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1100/308

3.6.1 Commissioning

This menu has four sub-menus:

– Inventory

– Software Download

– Configuration

– Backup / Restore

– Monitoring

3.6.1.1 Inventory

This menu provides all the inventory data of the NE.

Figure 40. Inventory

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 101/308

3.6.1.2 Software Download

This menu must be used to download a new software version on the NE (Software Package Versionstab-panel) or to get a summary of the specific software versions on the programmable different compo-nents on the Active bank (Active Software Package Summary tab-panel) or on the Stand-by bank (Stand-by Software Package Summary tab-panel).

3.6.1.2.1 Software Package Versions tab-panel

Figure 41. Software Download: Software Package versions

Warning: On the PC containing the Software Package must be installed an FTP Server.The PC's firewall (i.e Microsoft's default firewall) may prevent the download from starting up.

To download a new software version fill the FTP Server Parameters field (as shown in Figure 42):

– Server Address: enter the IP address of the Server

– Username: enter the username assigned to the FTP Server

– Password: enter the password assigned to the FTP Server

– Port: 21

then click on the Check button.

– Select in the Software Package field the file descriptor (previously copied on the PC). The path where to find it, after the SWP local copy, is //ECT/SWDW/R95MSS1C/1_0_0/R951C.DSC

– Put a check mark on the Forced check box to download the complete file without any comparison between the file already present in the stand-by bank and the new file to be downloaded.

– Press the Start Download button.

– At the end press the Activate button of the Stand-by Software Package.

– The NE reboots and the supervision is lost.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1102/308

Warning: After the activation of the Standby bank, the connection between the WebEML and the NE is lost. The WebEML must be re-launched.

Figure 42. Software download

3.6.1.2.2 Active Software Package Summary tab-panel

This tab-panel shows the version of the Software Package of the active bank.

Figure 43. Software Download: Active Software Package summary

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 103/308

3.6.1.2.3 Stand-by Software Package Summary tab-panel

This tab-panel shows the Software Package version of the stand-by bank.

Figure 44. Software Download: Stand-by Software Package summary

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1104/308

3.6.1.3 Configuration

3.6.1.3.1 Date/Time

The NE Date/Time screen displays the current NE time and the current computer time.

To re-align the NE time to the computer time, click on the Synchronize NE with Computer button and click on the Refresh button.

If an SNTP Server has to be used to distribute the time, the SNTP protocol must be enabled by a check mark in the SNTP Enabled box and the IP address of the Server must be inserted in the relevant field. The IP address of the Spare Server, if available, must be inserted in the relevant field.

Figure 45. Date/Time Configuration

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 105/308

3.6.1.3.2 Site Information

This menu has to be used to insert the optional information to identify the site (Site Name and Site Loca-tion).

Figure 46. Site Information

3.6.1.3.3 Protection

Select the 1+0 protection scheme and Apply.

Figure 47. Protection Configuration

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1106/308

3.6.1.3.4 Radio

1) Telecommunication standard

Select the ETSI market.

2) Modulation

The operation mode can be with Fixed Modulation (FCM) or with the Adaptive Modulation (ACM).

a) Operation with the Fixed Modulation (FCM) (Figure 48 and Figure 49)

• Select in the Coding Modulation Type field “Fixed (FCM)”.

• Select in the Channel Spacing field the suitable channel spacing to be used (up to 56 MHz for MPT-HC and up to 28 MHz for MPT-MC).

• Select the Modem Profile Option: Current Mask Standard Profile or New Mask Standard Profile

• Select in the Reference Modulation field the suitable Modulation scheme (up to 256 QAM for MPT-HC and up to 128 QAM for MPT-MC).

• According to the selected Channel Spacing and to the Modulation the relevant capacity in the Capacity field will appear.

b) Operation with the Adaptive Modulation (ACM) (Figure 50)

The main idea behind Adaptive Modulation in Point to Point system is to adjust adaptively the modulation as well as a range of other system parameters based on the near-instan-taneous channel quality information perceived by the receiver, which is feed back to the transmitter with the aid of a feedback channel.

The switching between the modulation schemes is hitless and maintains the same RF channel bandwidth.

To configure the Adaptive Modulation:

• Select in the Coding Modulation Type field “Adaptive (ACM)”.• Select in the Channel Spacing field the suitable channel spacing. • Select in the Modem Profile Option field the spectral efficiency class to be set as

reference: Current Mask Standard Profile or New Mask Standard Profile. • Select in the Reference Modulation field the reference modulation, which corre-

sponds to the lowest modulation scheme.• Choose in the Allowed Modulation field all the modulation schemes to be used with

the Adaptive Modulation. The modulation schemes (from the lowest to the highest scheme) must be contiguous.

3) Frequency

The system can operate with different types of ODU according to the RF band and to the chan-nel arrangement. There are ODUs which can manage only one shifter or several predefined shifters.

In the Shifter field select the suitable shifter.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 107/308

In the Tx frequency field insert the suitable Tx frequency (the Rx frequency is automatically calculated by using the inserted Tx frequency and the shifter).

In the Rx frequency field will appear the calculated Rx frequency, but, by putting a check mark in the Allow Rx Frequency Tuning check box this frequency can be changed in +5 MHz range to implement the “Exotic” shifter configuration, if required.

4) Tx Mute

To mute the transmitter put a check mark in the Mute check box.

5) Transmit Power Control Mode

Select the Mode: RTPC or ATPC.

6) RTPC settings

– Tx power without Adaptive Modulation

If the ATPC is disabled the Tx Power field is available. For the Tx Power range refer to the indication in the screen.

In this field write the new value within the allowed transmitted power range.

– Tx Power with Adaptive Modulation

The operator can modify only the Tx power relevant to the lowest modulation scheme. In this field the operator has to enter the constant power, which will be used with the lowest modulation.

The same power value will be used by the other modulation schemes.

7) ATPC settings

The ATPC cannot be set with ACM (only with FCM).

– ATPC Remote RSL Threshold

The value of the low power threshold can be changed by writing the new value in the field. When the Rx power is equal to this power the ATPC algorithm starts to operate.

– Min ATPC Tx power and Max ATPC Tx power

The Min Tx power and Max Tx power, regarding the Tx Range in the ATPC management, can be written in the relevant field.

Note

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1108/308

Figure 48. Radio Configuration: FCM - RTPC

Figure 49. Radio Configuration: FCM - ATPC

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 109/308

Figure 50. Radio Configuration: ACM - RTPC

3.6.1.3.5 Advanced Radio

Figure 51. Advanced Radio Configuration

This menu allows the operator to define the expected and sent identifier values of parameters related to the link management and, if necessary, modify them.

If the link identifier is Enabled the following fields can be written:

– Tx Radio Link Identifier: this field is the link identifier inserted on the transmitting NE (1 to 255)

– Expected Rx Radio Link Identifier: this field is the link identifier expected at the receiving NE (0 to 255)

N.B. If the Expected Rx Link Indentifier is "0", there is no link identifier mismatch management.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1110/308

3.6.1.3.6 MSS-1c

This menu allows:

[1] to configure the MSS-1c by using the Provisioning Tool;

[2] to download and execute a previously created configuration file (by using the provisioning tool) or to save on the PC the configuration of the MSS-1c.

Warning:On the PC containing the configuration file must be installed an FTP Server.

Figure 52. MSS-1c Configuration

[1] To configure the MSS-1c press button Start Tool. The Provisioning Tool opens (refer to chapter 3.6.6for the configuration procedures).

[2] To access the NE fill the FTP Server Parameters field (as shown in Figure 53):

• Server Address: enter the IP address of the Server

• Username: enter the username assigned to the FTP Server

• Password: enter the password assigned to the FTP Server

• Port: 21

then click on the Check button.

To download (from the PC to the NE) a configuration file:

1) click on Browse

2) select the configuration file to be downloaded

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 111/308

N.B. If the configuration file (created by using the MPT Provisioning Tool - refer to par. 3.6.6) has been created by using the Initial Configuration option or the Reconfigurationoption, after the download the NE will reboot. If the configuration file has been created by using the Change Configuration option, after the download the NE will not reboot.

3) click on Download and Execute

To upload (from the NE to the PC) the configuration of the NE:

1) click on Browse

2) assign a name to the configuration file to be saved

3) click on Upload

Figure 53. FTP Server Parameters

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1112/308

3.6.1.3.7 Networking

This menu must be used to assign (or to show) the networking configuration of the NE.

This menu has three sub-menus:

– Network Interfaces

– Static Routing

– Trusted SNMP Managers

3.6.1.3.7.1 Network Interfaces

– NE IP Parameters field

This IP address is the local IP address of the NE.

– TMN RF Access field

Put a check box in this field to get access to the NE in the remote radio station.

– NMS1/NMS2 IP Parameters fields

Assign the IP parameters to the 10/100Base-T 2 Ethernet ports (if required) for NMS application.

Note: In case of change of NMS1 (or 2) IP adress previously used for NMS2 (or 1), proceed in 2 steps: disable NMS2 (or1) and apply the configuration then change NMS1 (or 2) and apply the con-figuration.

– TMN In-band IP Parameters

Enter the IP Address with the relevant submask for the TMN In-band management.The VLAN ID can be changed only with the Provisioning Tool (value between 2 and 4080).

Warning: If the TMN In-band is not enabled in the Provisioning Tool, it is not possible the enable the TMN In-band by the WebEML.

Figure 54. Network Interfaces

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 113/308

3.6.1.3.7.2 Static Routing

The Static Routing menu allows to configure the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration.

– Route Type: possible selection is Network, Host, Default.

– Destination to address to a range of IP addresses with relevant subnet mask.

– Next Hop: the User can select Point to Point Link (to address the link on the radio side) or Gateway IP to define the address of a gateway reachable on one interface.

Figure 55. Static Routing

The Add button inserts above a new Static Routing Table row.

The Add Last inserts below a new Static Routing Table row.

The Delete button deletes the selected Static Routing Table row.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1114/308

3.6.1.3.7.3 Trusted SNMP Managers

A Trusted manager is an SNMP manager to which the NE automatically sends the TRAPS generated inside the NE.

Figure 56. Trusted SNMP Managers

To activate a Trusted Manager insert the IP Address of the SNMP manager, the UDP port and the Man-ager Type (Network Manager Layer or Equipment Manager Layer), then click on Register.

In Figure 57. one Manager has been created.

Figure 57. Manager registration

To delete a Manager select the Manager from the list and press Unregister.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 115/308

3.6.1.4 Backup / Restore

This menu allows to make a backup (save the NE configuration to the PC) and to make a restore (down-load a configuration, from a previously done backup, to the NE). The backup and restore is done through FTP.

Figure 58. Backup / Restore

Fill the FTP Server Parameters field.

Click Browse to select the directory and the name of the file.

Press Backup or Restore according to the operation to be done.

3.6.1.5 Monitoring

For this menu refer to paragraph 3.6.5.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1116/308

3.6.2 Performance Monitoring

This menu has five sub-menus:

– Performance History File Upload

– Normalized

– Adaptive Modulation

– Ethernet

– Monitoring

3.6.2.1 Performance History File Upload

This menu allows to export in a .csv file the data regarding the performance counters. This operation is done through an FTP session.

– Fill the FTP Server Parameters area with the FTP Server parameters.

– Select in the Performance Family field the type of counters to be exported: Normalized Perfor-mance Counters (refer to par. 3.6.2.2) / Adaptive Modulation Counters (refer to par. 3.6.2.3) / MPT QoS Ingress Counters (refer to par. 3.6.2.4.1).

Note: The counters to be exported must be stopped (refer to the relevant paragraphs).

– Select the History Period in second (default: 5s) and click Apply.

– Click on Browse to choose the destination directory and to assign the name of the file.

– Click on Upload History to export the file.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 117/308

Figure 59. Performance History File Upload

3.6.2.2 Normalized

3.6.2.2.1 Counter Thresholds

In the Counter Threshold screen the Low Threshold and High Threshold can be changed for each G.826 parameter (BBE, ES, SES). The high threshold will cause the activation of the alarm "Threshold exceeded" during the Performance Monitoring period and the low threshold will cause the deactivation of the same alarm.

N.B. For the 24 hour report only the High Threshold can be changed.

Press Apply to send to the equipment the new parameters.

Press Default to restore the default parameters.

Figure 60. Counter Thresholds

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1118/308

3.6.2.2.2 15Min Counter

The upper part of the screen will show the values of the current 15 min period, the lower part will show the last elapsed 15 min period.

Press the Activate button (1) to activate the 15 min normalized NE counter computation.

Press the Start icon (2) to start the monitoring of the current 15 min period and set the refresh period (if the NE counter computation is activated).

Press the Reset button to reset the NE counter computation (if the NE counter computation is activated)

Figure 61. 15Min Counter activation

Figure 62. 15Min Counter

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 119/308

When a 15 minute period is over, the period Data is automatically reported and shown on the lower part of the screen.

Figure 63. 15Min Counter history

Press the Stop icon (1) to stop the current 15 min counter monitoring.Press the Deactivate button (2) to deactivate the 15 min normalized NE counter computation (if the counter monitoring is stopped).

Figure 64. 15Min Counter deactivation

3.6.2.2.3 24H Counter

The 24H Counter is identical to the 15Min Counter, but the period is 24 hours and not 15 minutes.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1120/308

3.6.2.3 Adaptive Modulation

The Adaptive Modulation Counter screen will show the total seconds during which each modulation scheme has been used.

3.6.2.3.1 15Min Counter

The upper part of the screen will show the values of the current 15 min period, the lower part will show the last elapsed 15 min period.

Press the Activate button (1) to activate the 15 min normalized NE counter computation.

Press the Start icon (2) to start the monitoring of the current 15 min period and set the refresh period (if the NE counter computation is activated).

Press the Reset button to reset the NE counter computation (if the NE counter computation is activated).

Figure 65. Adaptive Modulation counter activation

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 121/308

Figure 66. 15Min Counter

When a 15 minute period is over, the period Data is automatically reported and shown on the lower part of the screen.

Figure 67. 15Min Counter history

Press the Stop icon (1) to stop the current 15 min counter monitoring.

Press the Deactivate button (2) to deactivate the 15 min normalized NE counter computation (if the counter monitoring is stopped).

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1122/308

Figure 68. 15Min Counter deactivation

3.6.2.3.2 24H Counter

The 24H Counter is identical to the 15Min Counter, but the period is 24 hours and not 15 minutes.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 123/308

3.6.2.4 Ethernet

3.6.2.4.1 MPT QoS Ingress Counters

MPT QoS Ingress counters computation is always activated.

The upper part of the screen will show a graphical evolution of the counters.

The lower part will show a table reporting the counter values when the monitoring is activated. Each time the counters are refreshed, an entry will be added in the table.

Press the Start icon to start the monitoring of the MPT QoS Ingress counters and set the refresh period (default : 5s ).

Press the Stop icon to stop the MPT QoS Ingress counters monitoring.

Press the Reset button to reset the NE counter computation

Figure 69. Ethernet: Qos Counters

The QoS counters are:

– Transmitted Frames

– Discarded Frames

– Transmitted Bytes

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1124/308

The counters are shown in the following formats:

– bar

– graphical

– tabular

and can be displayed for a single queue (Queue # tab-panel) or for all the queues (Aggregate tab-panel).

The default span of the graphical format is 24 hours, but is can be changed.

An example of the QoS Counters screen is given in Figure 70.

Figure 70. Qos Counters example for Aggregate

3.6.2.5 Monitoring

For the Alarms sub-menu refer to paragraph 3.6.5.1.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 125/308

3.6.3 Troubleshooting

This menu has three sub-menus:

– Inventory

– Troubleshooting

– Monitoring

3.6.3.1 Inventory

This menu provides all the inventory data of the NE.

Figure 71. Inventory

3.6.3.2 Troubleshooting

This menu allows:

[1] to activate the available loopbacks on the MPT;

[2] to manually manage the ACM;

[3] to restart the MPT.

[1] Two loopbacks are available:

• Line Side (the signal is send back to the Indoor equipment)

• Radio Side (the signal is send back to the remote station)

To activate a loopback select the loopback and press Activate.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1126/308

A timout can be associated to the loopback. Enter the suitable timeout (max: 4 days) and click on Apply.

Figure 72. Loopback activation

To deactivate a loopback press Deactivate.

[2] To lock the ACM engine put a check mark in the Lock ACM engine box and select the modulation scheme to be used.

Figure 73. ACM Manual Management

[3] To restart the MPT press the Restart NE button.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 127/308

3.6.3.3 Monitoring

For this menu refer to paragraph 3.6.5.

3.6.4 Maintenance

The Maintenance menu has 5 sub-menus:

– Inventory (refer to paragraph 3.6.1.1)

– Backup / Restore (refer to paragraph 3.6.1.4)

– Software Download (refer to paragraph 3.6.1.2)

– Configuration > Radio (refer to paragraph 3.6.1.3.4)

– Monitoring (refer to paragraph 3.6.5)

Figure 74. Maintenance

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1128/308

3.6.5 Monitoring

This menu has four sub-menus:

– Alarms

– Power measurements

– Modem measurements

– Events (only in the Troubleshooting menu)

3.6.5.1 Alarms

The Alarms menu allows to display and store the alarms of the NE.

Two global lists of alarms are displayed:

– CURRENT ALARMS shows all the equipment alarms currently present,

– ALARM LOG shows all the equipment alarms currently present and the history of the alarms (i.e. cleared alarms).

When an alarm is no longer active it disappears from the Current Alarm list and it is displayed in the Alarm log list as a cleared alarm

The alarms have a different color according to their severity and their state.

– Red: CRITICAL alarm

– Orange: MAJOR alarm

– Yellow: MINOR alarm

– Cyan: WARNING alarm

– Blue: INDETERMINATE alarm (Note that the equipment has no alarm having such severity)

– Green: CLEARED alarm (alarm no longer active).

Within the tab-panel, each alarm is provided with the information below.

– Time Stamp: date and time of the alarm. The format of date and time is yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.

– Probable Cause: name of the probable cause of the alarm.

– Type: alarm class (COMMUNICATION – alarm not created inside the equipment, but generated by a connected equipment or due to transmission/propagation problems; EQUIPMENT: inside alarm of the equipment).

– Object: object of the equipment where the alarm occurred.

– Severity: alarm severity.

– Additional Text: this is an additional text regarding the alarm.

Note

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 129/308

Figure 75. Alarms

3.6.5.2 Power measurements

To start the measurements click on Start icon.

Start

Figure 76. Power measurements

Select the Refresh Period (default = 5 sec)

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1130/308

Stop

Figure 77. Power measurements

The screen is divided in two parts, relevant to the two radio hop directions:

– Near End To Far End Power Monitoring (upper part)

– Far End To Near End Power Monitoring (lower part)

The bar indications and the curves, regarding the Tx Power and the Rx signal (RSL), are shown for each direction. The Span of the curve can be changed.

Available buttons from the left to the right side:

– Zoom Out

– Zoom In

– Scroll Lock

– Left and right arrows (4 buttons) to navigate in the curve

– Erase to erase the curves

– Export to create an Excel file to store the Power measurements.

To stop the measurements press the Stop icon on the upper right corner.

N.B. In the power graph the time starts from 0, to know the real time corresponding to 0, open the csv file to get the real time.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 131/308

3.6.5.3 Modem measurements

To start the measurements click on Start icon.

Start

Figure 78. Modem measurements

Select the Refresh Period (default = 5 sec)

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1132/308

Stop

Figure 79. Modem measurements

The screen is divided in two parts, relevant to the two radio hop directions:

– Near End To Far End Modem Monitoring (upper part)

– Far End To Near End Modem Monitoring (lower part)

The bar indications and the curves, regarding the MSE and the used Modulation scheme, are shown for each direction. By putting the mouse on the curve more information is available, as shown in the Figure. The Span of the curve can be changed.

Available buttons from the left to the right side:

– Zoom Out

– Zoom In

– Scroll Lock

– Left and right arrows (4 buttons) to navigate in the curve

– Erase to erase the curves

– Export to create an Excel file to store the Power measurements.

To stop the measurements press the Stop icon on the upper right corner.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 133/308

3.6.5.4 Events

The Events menu allows to display all the messages exchanged between the WebEML and the NE.

An event is meant to be:

– a configuration change

– a change of the value of an attribute

– a manual operation carried out by the operator.

The following information is provided for each event:

– Date: date and time of occurrence of the event. The format is week day/month/day hh:mm:ss. Ref-erence Time (CEST) year.

– Source: the source of the event.

– Details: a statement built with the event log data to explain what the event represents.

Figure 80. Events

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1134/308

3.6.6 Provisioning Tool

This tool allows to configure the MSS-1c. It is launched by the Start Tool button on the MSS-1c menu of the WebEML.

The Welcome screen asks to select one of the 3 configuration modes:

– Initial Configuration: to start from an empty configuration

– Reconfiguration: to load an existing configuration file and then modify everything

– Change Configuration: to load an existing configuration file and modify only some items. This is useful to modify a running configuration without impacting already configured services (cross conec-tions and VLANs). When this file will be downloaded to the NE by using the WebEML (menu Con-figuration > MSS-1c) the NE will not reboot after the download.

Figure 81. Provisioning Tool: Welcome screen

To configure the NE enter step by step all the menus as explained in para 3.6.6.1 to para 3.6.6.7.

Note 1: When the provisioning file will be loaded into the NE in order to set up the Configuration, the behaviour of the NE will depend on the way the configuration has been realized.

Note 2: If you have selected Initial configuration or Reconfiguration, after the download of the configuration file into the NE, the NE will reset and at start-up will send the new configuration.

Note 3: If you have selected Change Configuration, after the download of the configuration file into the NE, the NE will send directly the configuration to the NE. In this case the configuration can be modified, that is removing or creating some cross connections or VLANs or enabling or disabling user ports without impacting the traffic on unmodified circuits.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 135/308

3.6.6.1 Ethernet port provisioning

Figure 82. Ethernet ports provisioning

3.6.6.1.1 MPT Connection

MPT connected through: select the right port where the MPT is connected to MSS-1c. This information is used to configure the radio ports used in cross connections (TDM and VLANs).

3.6.6.1.2 User 1- electrical port

To configure an Electrical user port like user 1:

– Port Enabled: check the box

– Auto negotiation:

• check the box: the port will negotiate speed and duplex mode with its peer

• do not check the box: speed and duplex mode are selected by the operator (forced mode)

– If Auto negotiation is selected, for Speed select one or several check boxes, the same for duplex mode

– If Auto negotiation is not selected, for Speed select only one value, the same for duplex mode.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1136/308

3.6.6.1.3 User 2- electrical - syncE port

To configure a SyncE electrical port like user 2, proceed the same way as for user 1. In addition configure the Network synchronization.

– Auto, if you do not use the syncE property of the port

– SyncE IN, if you use the port as synchronization input. MSS-1c receives clock from external equip-ment.

– SyncE OUT, if you use the port as a synchronization output. MSS-1c sends its clock to external equipment.

Note this feature is authorized only if the port is set in Auto negotiation mode with speed 1000 Mbit/s and full duplex only.

3.6.6.1.4 User 3 & 4-electrical / optical port

Thanks to SFP connected into the relevant slots, these two ports can be configured in electrical or optical mode.

Once the Port Enable Check box is selected, you can choose the type of SFP in the SFP list (Disable or Electrical or Optical)

In the Electrical mode, the configuration is like user 1.

In the Optical mode, the Port configuration can be set to Auto negotiation or not (forced mode). The speed is always 1000 Mbit/s.

The duplex mode is always Full Duplex.

Note: User port 2 can be used as SynchE port.

3.6.6.2 PDH ports and local IWF cross connection provisioning

For the explanation of the traffic profiles TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH refer to par. 2.8.8 on page 79.

Note: The 75 ohm unbalanced impedance with BNC or 1.6/5.6 connectors. The 120 ohm balanced impedance with other connectors.

3.6.6.2.1 TDM2TDM Cross connection

To configure a TDM2TDM cross connection:

– Configure the E1 port Impedance (75 or 120 ohm)

– Choose the E1 port you want to configure (between 1 and 10)

– In column Enabled: Check the box

– In column Flow Id: Enter a valid VLAN Id (between 2 and 4080). Note that VLAN Id is unique.

– In column Service Profile: Select TDM2TDM in the list (default value)

– In column Node Timing: Check the box or not. When it is selected, the regenerated E1 at receiver side are synchronized to the network element clock (NEC)

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 137/308

– In column XCo to port: Select Radio Port (default value). The cross connection is established between an E1 port and the Radio

Port E1-1 and E1-2 are being configured in the figure which follows.

Figure 83. Cross connection TDM2TDM

The “One shot tributaries configuration” is also available to configure all the tributaries in one shot as shown in Figure 84.

N.B. In case of the "One shot tributary configuration" is not fully displayed, check that you have selected "classic window" setting, if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7.

N.B. In Reconfiguration mode, if the user creates a new TDM XCO on a new TDM port with a VLAN Id used previously for another TDM port which is now disabled, this new TDM XCO will not work (example: E1-1 is configured with VLAN Id 10. Reconfigure the MSS-1c with E1-1 disabled and E1-2 enabled with VLAN Id 10).Two workarounds may be used:

1) re-enable the disabled TDM port and configure it with an unused VLAN Id (in our example: enable E1-1 with VLAN Id 9);

2) switch off then on the MSS-1c.

Figure 84. One shot tributaries configuration

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1138/308

The following picture shows the different elements involved in the cross connection, in green the PDH part and CES part (encapsulation in Ethernet frame done by IWF), in blue the Ethernet part realized by the switch.

Figure 85. Cross connection functional scheme

3.6.6.2.2 TDM2ETH Cross connection

To configure a TDM2ETH cross connection:

– Configure the E1 port Impedance (75 or 120 Ohms). This choice is for all the ports.

– Choose the E1 port you want to configure (between 1 and 10)

– In column Enabled: Check the box

– In column Flow Id: Enter a valid VLAN Id (between 2 and 4080). Note that VLAN Id is unique.

– In column Service Profile: Select TDM2ETH in the list

– In columns ECID TX and ECID RX: Enter an ECID RX and ECID TX which are identifiers of the E1 flow

– In column TDM Clock Sync: Select Differential or Adaptive in the list

– In column Node Timing: Check the box or not. When it is selected, the regenerated E1 at receiver side are synchronized to the network element clock (NEC)

– In column XCo to port: Select Radio Port (default value). The cross connection is established between an E1 port and the Radio port.

See E1-2 in the previous screenshot of Figure 83.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 139/308

3.6.6.2.3 Cross connection to user Ethernet port

Figure 86. Cross connection to user Ethernet port

N.B. In case of the "One shot tributary configuration" is not fully displayed, check that you have selected "classic window" setting, if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7.

N.B. In Reconfiguration mode, if the user creates a new TDM XCO on a new TDM port with a VLAN Id used previously for another TDM port which is now disabled, this new TDM XCO will not work (example: E1-1 is configured with VLAN Id 10. Reconfigure the MSS-1c with E1-1 disabled and E1-2 enabled with VLAN Id 10).Two workarounds may be used:

1) re-enable the disabled TDM port and configure it with an unused VLAN Id (in our example: enable E1-1 with VLAN Id 9);

2) switch off then on the MSS-1c.

To configure a cross connection between an E1 port and a user port:

– First, enter the parameters as explained in the previous paragraphs, then

– In column Service Profile: Select TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth. If TDM2TDM has been selected the Ethernet user port must be connected to an Ethernet user port of another MSS-c.

– In column XCO to Port: Select a user port (user 1 to user 4) in the list

– In column MAC Addr: Enter the External IWF MAC address which is used as Destination Address in Ethernet frames built to carry TDM information in MPR network

The following picture represents the different elements involved in the cross connection, in green the PDH part and CES part (encapsulation in Ethernet frame done by IWF), in blue the Ethernet part realized by the switch.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1140/308


User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 141/308

3.6.6.3 Management port provisioning

Figure 88. Management port provisioning

3.6.6.3.1 NMS1 & NMS2

To configure the NMS1 and NMS2 ports, in the relevant area:

– Port Enabled: check the box

– Auto negotiation:

• check the box: the port will negotiate speed and duplex mode with its peer

• do not check the box: speed and duplex mode are selected by the operator (forced mode)

– If Auto negotiation is selected, for Speed select one or several check boxes, the same for duplex mode

– If Auto negotiation is not selected, for Speed select only one value, the same for duplex mode

3.6.6.3.2 In-band TMN on one user Ethernet port configuration

To configure the TMN In-band:

– Enabled: Check the box

– Port number: Select one port in the list. For 802.1D mode, whatever the port selected, the VLAN will be broadcasted on all the 4 ports.

– TMN VLAN Id: Enter a valid VLAN Id in the range 2 to 4080.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1142/308

3.6.6.3.3 NE Public MAC Address

NE public MAC address: used as Source Address in Ethernet frames built to carry TDM information in MPR network. This is a read only field. The NE public MAC address is a parameter of the application. It is given at launch time.

3.6.6.4 Create a TDM cross connection between Radio and Ethernet port

Figure 89. TDM cross connection between radio and Ethernet port

Max. number of cross-connections: 239.

To configure a TDM cross connection between radio and Ethernet port:

– Push button Add cross-connection and fill the fields.

– In column User port: Select a port in the list

– In column Flow Id: Enter a valid VLAN Id (between 2 and 4080). This VLAN Id must be equal to the one used to encapsulate PDH flows at the transmitter side

– In column Service Profile: Select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH, also equal to what is configured at trans-mitter side

– In column TDM Clock Sync: Select Differential or Adaptive in the list. The clock sync is also equal to what is configured at transmitter side: Differential or Adaptive

– In column Outgoing MAC destination: enter the MAC address of the destination equipment.

– Note that Outgoing MAC Source address, which is equal to the NE MAC address, is displayed for information and will be used with the previous one to generate the cross connection inside the switch.

The following picture represents the elements involved in the cross connection, here only the switch. In blue the Ethernet part realized by the switch.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 143/308


3.6.6.5 Network Synchronization Clock provisioning

Figure 91. Network Synchronization Clock provisioning

N.B. Only the ports (ETH and PDH) previously defined are available to support the synchronization.

To configure the network synchronization:

– Synchronization role, select in the list:

• Master means the NE will send the clock through radio link to another NE

• Slave means the NE receives the clock from the radio link or another source

– Restoration criteria, select a criteria in the list. This is used to configure the behavior of the syn-chronization system when it has switched to secondary source and when the primary source becomes available:

• Revertive means the NEC comes back to the primary source

• Not revertive means the NEC stays locked to the secondary source and will return to the primary source only when the secondary one will fail

– Primary source, select one of the proposed source

– Secondary source, select one of the proposed source

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1144/308

For more details on the Synchronization refer to par. 2.8.12.2 on page 93.

The following picture shows an example of network where the left NE is the master clock NE. It takes its synchronization clock from an external source.

Other NEs are slaves NE which are synchronized through the radio link.

Note that in the Slave mode the primary source can be a SyncE port.

3.6.6.6 Bridge provisioning (Create a user virtual LAN)

In the NE bridge mode field select in the list:

– 802.1D: default switch configuration, MAC learning based switching

– 802.1Q: switch mode with Virtual LAN, gives access to the table below. Switching is based on MAC and VLAN Id

Figure 92. NE bridge mode selection

To create a user virtual LAN:

– Push button Add VLAN and fill the fields.

– In column VLAN Id: Enter a valid VLAN Id (from 2 to 4080) and not used in another VLAN or cross connection

– In column VLAN Name: Enter a name

– In columns User 1 to 4: Check the box if the port is implied in the VLAN. Both enabled and disabled ports can be member of a VLAN. Note that radio port is automatically included.

– In columns Untagged User 1 to 4: Check the box if you want the port removes VLAN tag at egress.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 145/308

To remove an existing virtual LAN:

– Tick the box of the VLAN ID in the list

– Push the Remove VLAN button.

3.6.6.7 Port VLAN provisioning

This screen can be filled only if the 802.1Q bridge mode has been selected in Bridge provisioning screen.

Figure 93. Port VLAN provisioning

To configure the behavior of each user port you can:

– Select Admit all frames (to admit untagged frames and priority frames). For untagged frames at ingress:

• Select the VLAN ID in the proposed list. This list contains all the VLAN in which the port is involved.

• Select the priority in the list (from 0 to 7)

N.B. If you select VLAN ID = 1 and priority = X for an untagged flow, then priority = X will be taken into account for MSS QoS only. Indeed as VLAN 1 is removed at active MPT port egress, this untagged flow will go to default MPT QoS.

– Or select Admit Tag Frames Only. In this case untagged frames are dropped.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1146/308

3.6.6.8 Configuration file saving

Once each element has been configured (as explained in the previous paragraphs), press the Create but-ton and enter the name of the configuration file.

Note 1: When this file will be loaded into the NE in order to set up the Configuration, the behaviour of the NE will depend on the way the configuration has been realized.

Note 2: If you have selected Initial configuration or Reconfiguration, after the download of the configuration file into the NE, the NE will reset and at start-up will send the new configuration.

Note 3: If you have selected Change Configuration, after the download of the configuration file into the NE, the NE will send directly the configuration to the NE. In this case the configuration can be modified, that is removing or creating some cross connections or VLANs or enabling or disabling user ports without impacting the traffic on unmodified circuits.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 147/308

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1148/308

4 Installation

4.1 Installation & Interconnection overview

The available different installations are shown in Figure 94. for MPT-MC and in Figure 95.-Figure 96. for MPT-HC.

Figure 94. Station interconnections with MPT-MC

Figure 95. Station interconnections with MPT-HC with Power Extractor

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 149/308

Figure 96. Station interconnections with MPT-HC (optical cable + coax. power supply cable to MSS-1c)

Figure 97. Station interconnections with MPT-HC (optical cable + coax. power supply cable to Station battery)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1150/308

4.2 Hardware Installation

– 4.2.1 - Power consumption on page 151

– 4.2.2 - Rack Installation on page 152

– 4.2.3 - MSS-1c installation on page 162

– 4.2.4 - MPT-HC Installation on page 168

– 4.2.5 - MPT-MC Installation on page 208

– 4.2.6 - Power Extractor on page 228

– 4.2.7 - Indoor Installation on page 229

– 4.2.8 - Antenna Alignment on page 237

4.2.1 Power consumption

Part Max. Power Consumption Typical Power Consumption

MSS-1c 17 W 13 W

FAN 2 W 2 W

MPT-HC 38 W 38 W

MPT-MC 40 W 40 W

Figures are for normal (not start-up) operation.

Note

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 151/308

4.2.2 Rack Installation

4.2.2.1 General

MSS-1c can be installed in 2 different ways:

– "ETSI (WTD) rack (21") (see par. 4.2.2.2 on page 152)

– Laborack (19") (par. 4.2.2.3 on page 157)

For each of the above type of installation special mechanical supporting fixtures are available.

Special mechanical fittings are provided for this type of installation, depending on the width of rack (19" or 21"). The examples show the fittings used to insert the equipment in ETSI racks (21"). For installation in 21" racks the adaptors are needed.

4.2.2.2 ETSI Rack Installation

4.2.2.2.1 Mechanical Installation

Installation has been sub-divided into the following phases:

– Rack Positioning and Fastening

– Fixing the rack to floor using expansion bolts or Fixing to floating floor;

– T.R.U. fastening to ETSI rack.

4.2.2.2.2 Rack Positioning and fastening

Proceed as follows:

– Refer to the plant documentation to see rack row assignment

– Fasten the rack to the station structure according to one of the following procedures

– Fixing the rack to floor

– Fixing the rack to floating floor

4.2.2.2.3 Fixing the rack to floor using expansion bolts

(Refer to Figure 98. and Figure 99.).

– Mount the rack in a vertical position in the desired place.

– Mark the base-plate with six holes (1) to be drilled on the floor.

– Temporarily remove the rack and drill the holes at the points drawn on the floor. Place the inserts into the holes.

– Secure the expander bolts to the floor through the base-plate holes.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1152/308

Figure 98. Fixing the Rack to Floor (1)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 153/308

Figure 99. Fixing the Rack to Floor (2)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1154/308

4.2.2.2.4 Fixing to floating floor

(Refer to Figure 100. and Figure 101.).

The drilling mask is the same used for concrete floor fastening.

In this case a hole must be created for the cables coming from the bottom according to Figure 100.

The rack fastening is to be mounted on the concrete floor below using a suitable stud as shown in Figure 100.

Using the row layout drawing, mark out the cable entry areas in the floor tiles and cut out with a jigsaw. Remember that the beginning of the row must be approved by the customer.

N.B. Unused or incompletely used cable entry areas should be blocked off with foam rubber.

Figure 100. Floor file drilling template

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 155/308

Figure 101. Example of securing rack assembly to computer floor

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1156/308

4.2.2.3 Laborack (19") installation

Figure 102. Laborack

The Laborack must be fixed to the floor by means of the four (4) screws.

(For more information see the manufacturer instructions).

When you have correctly positioned the fixing brackets on the 19" unit, the front panel will hold the equipment by four screws fitted into the laborack cage nuts.

Fasten the IDU to the rack by inserting screws into holes of 19" mechanical adaptors and by screwing them into relevant holes provided with nut cage situated on rack brackets.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 157/308

4.2.2.4 Top Rack Unit

The Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.) fastening to the rack guarantees the connection to the protection ground in that the rack is wired to the station protection ground.

Figure 103. Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.)

The T.R.U. is positioned on the top of the Rack and it is used to provide the Power Supply to the equipment.

Figure 104. Top Rack Unit - Front/Rear

The T.R.U. is fixed to the rack by means of two (2) screws.

Figure 105. Top Rack Unit - Fixed to rack

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1158/308

4.2.2.4.1 Top Rack Unit Components

Description Component Q.ty Particular View

Terminal Block 16mm² 2

Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker Unipolar 6

Bus Bar Supply to 12 Fuse Carrier 1

Screws M6x16 with plastic Washer 4

Natched Clamp Nuts M6 4

Rail + Front 19" 1

4.2.2.4.2 Top Rack Unit Connections

The photos below show the connections from IDU to T.R.U.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 159/308

Figure 106. TRU Connections

4.2.2.4.3 Top Rack Unit Grounding

The rack must be grounded by means of a connection to the protection ground terminal of the site electrical plant.

The rack must be connected to the protection ground before performing any other electrical connection.

Figure 107. TRU Grounding position on Laborack

The rack is grounded to the station through a 16 to 25 mm2 (1 to 2 AWG) section cable (1) terminated onto the cable terminal lug (2).

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1160/308

Figure 108. ETSI Rack - Ground connection

Figure 109. Laborack - Ground connection

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 161/308

4.2.3 MSS-1c installation

Special brackets are provided depending on the equipment composition and on the width of the rack (19” or 21”).

MSS-1c (one or two) and the FAN unit must be first installed on the bracket by using the screws, provided with the brackets, and then the assembly must be installed on the rack.

Four installation configurations are available for installation in 19” rack:

1) One MSS-1c (Left mounting) + Bracket kit 3DB77052AAXX

2) One MSS-1c (Right mounting) + Bracket kit 3DB77052AAXX

3) Two MSS-1c + 1 Bracket 3DB77008ACXX

4) One MSS-1c + one FAN unit + 1 Bracket 3DB77008ACXX

For the installation in 21” rack the 21” Adapter kit (3CC50065AAAA) must be added to each 19” installation configuration.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1162/308

4.2.3.1 MSS-1c grounding

The assembly must be grounded by using the ground screw present on the bracket, as shown in Figure 110. and Figure 111.

The section cable (wire) is 6 mm² (9AWG) (Yellow/Green).

Figure 110. Grounding

Figure 111. Grounding

4.2.3.2 Power Supply Cable

Figure 112. Power supply connector

A power cable (2x1 mm2 - AWG12) is supplied (1AC007800068).

The blue wire must be connected to -48 Vdc (live); the black wire to ground/+ve.

The cable must be screwed to the MSS-1c and to the TRU.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 163/308

4.2.3.3 Installation of more than one MSS-1c in one rack

Several MSS-1c can be stacked in one rack, as shown in the following figures.

Figure 113. Installation solution


User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1164/308


In case of Figure 113. no space is necessary from one MSS-1c assembly to another assembly; in case of Figure 114. and Figure 115. it is necessary to space the two assemblies of 1/2 U.

4.2.3.4 E1 External connections

The E1 streams must be connected to the available three E1 distributors by using the special cables as shown in Figure 116., Figure 117. and Figure 118..

(Note)

Figure 116. Interconnections to connector support 1.6/5.6 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061AAAA)

Note: The cable has 8xE1, but only the first 2xE1s are used.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 165/308

(Note)

Figure 117. Interconnections to connector support BNC 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061ABAA)


9-161-88 OUT

8 IN

8 OUT

8 IN

(Note)

Figure 118. Interconnections to support 19 Inch modules 120 ohm Panel 3U (3CC07810AAAA)


User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1166/308

The interconnections to the E1 distributor (3CC07810AAAA) are shown in the following two figures.

Figure 119.

Figure 120.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 167/308

4.2.4 MPT-HC Installation

The MPT-HC installation section is divided in:

– Types of MPT-HC (par. 4.2.4.1 on page 169)

– MPT-HC operative information (par. 4.2.4.2 on page 171)

– How to change polarization in the MPT-HC (par. 4.2.4.3 on page 179)

– Types of Pole Mounting Installation kits (par. 4.2.4.4 on page 181)

– Types of nose adapters (par. 4.2.4.5 on page 182)

– 1+0 MPT-HC installation (integrated antenna) - all frequencies (par. 4.2.4.6 on page 183)

– 1+0 MPT-HC installation (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies (par. 4.2.4.7 on page 186)

– How to pull up the cables from indoor to the MPT-HC (par. 4.2.4.8 on page 188)

– Cable connection to MPT-HC (11-38 GHz) (par. 4.2.4.9 on page 193)

– Cable connection to MPT-HC (6-7-8 GHz) (par. 4.2.4.10 on page 198)

– Installing the “Flextwist“ waveguide (not integrated antenna cases) (par. 4.2.4.11 on page 201)

– MPT-HC system grounding (par. 4.2.4.12 on page 203)

– Cable Grounding (par. 4.2.4.13 on page 204)

– Type N connectors and Grounding kits waterproofing on the IDU/ODU cables (par. 4.2.4.14 on page 205)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1168/308

4.2.4.1 Types of MPT-HC

The MPT-HC consists of one or two cabinets including the Ethernet interface + modem + RF transceiver + branching of a channel.

Three mechanical solutions are adopted:

[1] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation (11 GHz to 38 GHz), shown in Figure 121., where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-HC cabinet; this type of MPT-HC is identified by one Logistical Item only;

[2] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation and different mechanics from 11-38 GHz (6 GHz), shown in Figure 122., where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-HC cabinet; this type of MPT-HC is identified by one Logistical Item only;

[3] with external diplexer: due to an high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of the shifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), shown in Figure 123., where MPT-HC is composed by two independent units: the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the RF TRANS-CEIVER assembly (containing the RF section); each of this type of MPT-HC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly and another for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

TRANSCEIVER + BRANCHING MPT-HC IDENTIFICATION LABEL

CO-BOX

Figure 121. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (11-38 GHz)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 169/308

Figure 122. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (6 GHz)

TRANSCEIVER

CO-BOX

BRANCHING

BRANCHINGIDENTIFICATION LABEL (INSIDE)

TRANSCEIVERIDENTIFICATION

LABEL

Figure 123. Views of MPT-HC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1170/308

4.2.4.2 MPT-HC operative information

This paragraph gives operative information, for installation regarding:

– MPT-HC with embedded or external diplexer herebelow

– MPT-HC with external diplexer (additional information) on page 174

4.2.4.2.1 Operative information on MPT-HC with embedded or external diplexer

4.2.4.2.1.1 General, views and access points

Figure 124. on page 172 (for MPT-HC with embedded diplexer) and Figure 125. on page 173 (for MPT-HC with external diplexer) show MPT-HC views and access points.

The external interfaces are listed in Table 16. below, with the corresponding connector.

Table 16. MPT-HC external interfaces

Ref. in Figure 124.

and Figure 125.

Interface Connector Further information

(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler waveguide Table 17. herebelow

(2) Connector for power supply coax. cable male N 50 ohm

(3) Hole for Ethernet connection (in the co-box) Gland for Cat5e or optical cable

(optional)

(4) Hole for connection to a second MPT-HC in 1+1 (in the co-box)

Not used

Table 17. RF interface

FREQUENCY GHz -> 6 7 8 11 13-15 18-26 38

Waveguide type -> WR137 WR112 WR112 WR75 WR62 WR42 WR28

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 171/308

(1) (A)

(A)(A)

(A)

(2)

(3) (4)

RJ45SFP for 1+1 configuration

(not used)

Place to install the optional SFP plug-in

OPENING THE CO-BOX

(A) Locking hooks (4) to fix/unfix MPT-HC assembly to antenna or coupler

(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler. Remove the plastic cover.WARNING: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC. It must never be removed.

Figure 124. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (11-38 GHz)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1172/308

(1) (A)

(A)(A)

(A)(2)

(B)(B)

(B)(B)

(3)

(4)

SFP for 1+1 configuration(not used)

Place to install the optional SFP for optical connection

OPENING THE CO-BOX

RJ45 for electrical connection

(A) 4 locking hooks to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to transceiver

(B) 4 locking hooks to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to antenna or coupler


Figure 125. Views of MPT-HC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 173/308

(1) (A)

(A)(A)

(A)(2)

(3)

(4)

SFP for 1+1 configuration(not used)

Place to install the optional SFP for optical connection

OPENING THE CO-BOX

RJ45 for electrical connection



Figure 126. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (6 GHz)

4.2.4.2.2 Additional operative information on MPT-HC with external diplexer

4.2.4.2.2.1 MPT-HC composition

As shown in Figure 127., the MPT-HC assembly is made up of two boxes, one for diplexer system (BRANCHING) and the other for the all other active functions (TRANSCEIVER) connected together to form the MPT-HC.

An O-RING present in the TRANSCEIVER box guarantees the MPT-HC assembly waterproofness.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1174/308

N.B. This is a conductive O-RING and must be left dry. Do not wet it with silicon grease (silicon grease must be used only on O-ring between MPT-HC and antenna).

BRANCHING TRANSCEIVER

WARNING 1 WARNING 2

Figure 127. Composition of MPT-HC with external diplexer

WARNING 1: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC. It must never be removed.

WARNING 2: This gasket must never be removed.

The TRANSCEIVER box performs all the functions, but does not include the diplexer system.

The BRANCHING box provides the interface between the pole mounting/antenna and the TRANS-CEIVER.

The favorite solution foresees the possibility to change in field a spare part TRANSCEIVER without dis-connecting the BRANCHING box from the pole mounting/antenna. The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCH-ING boxes fixing and unfixing are obtained through the four levers.

4.2.4.2.2.2 TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling

Figure 128. below shows the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces:

– (A) BRANCHING box label informative contentdescribed in Figure 131. on page 178

– (B) (HIGH FREQ) and (C) (LOW FREQ) RF interfaces on BRANCHING box

– (D) (TX) and (E) (RX) RF interfaces on TRANSCEIVER box

The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes can be coupled in two alternative ways (180°-rotated with respect to each other):

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 175/308

– BRANCHING box (B) (HIGH FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX)in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the HIGH frequency range of the Shifter set by the Craft Terminal (see field D in Figure 131. on page 178); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the corresponding LOW frequency range;

– BRANCHING box (C) (LOW FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX)in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the LOW frequency range of the Shifter set by the Craft Terminal (see field D in Figure 131. on page 178); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the corresponding HIGH frequency range.

(A) (B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

Figure 128. MPT-HC TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces

N.B. There is only one possible way to couple the BRANCHING box and the TRANSCEIVER box: there is a mistake-proofing put by the factory on the TRANSCEIVER box, whose position depends on the type of transceiver (low or high band, as shown in Figure 129.) to ensure that the association with the BRANCHING box is always the right one.

Hole

Mistake-proofing

Figure 129. 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC BRANCHING box mistake-proofing

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1176/308

4.2.4.2.3 Labels affixed on the MPT-HC

a) The label depicted in Figure 130. below is affixed externally to all types of MPT-HC and MPT-HC TRANSCEIVER boxes;

b) Only for MPT-HC with external diplexers, an additional label, depicted in Figure 131. on page 178, is placed on the branching assembly.

SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING

9500-MPR Equipment Acronym & Alcatel-Lucent Logo

CE European Community logo

! Not harmonized frequency logo

2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Elec-tronic Equipment) Logo

-28 V / -58 V 1,6 A / 0,8 A Power supply range and current range

Logistical Item (shown numbers as examples) Logistical Item for Customer

A Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128

Serial n° (shown numbers as examples) Factory Serial number

B Factory Serial number bar code 128

TX Frequency MHz (shown numbers as examples) Working frequency range

Shifter MHz (shown numbers as examples) Shifter

TX Sub-band (shown numbers as examples) TX Sub-band

Initial SW/ICS (shown numbers as examples) P/N and ICS of the software loaded in factory

PN/ICS (shown numbers as examples) Factory P/N + ICS

C Factory P/N + ICS bar code 128

Figure 130. Label affixed on the MPT-HC and MPT-HC TRANSCEIVER box

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 177/308

N.B. In the label A9400 is written because the diplexers are also used in A9400 AWY.


A9400 Equipment Acronym & Alcatel-Lucent Logo


12345 (example) Notified body



PN/ICS 3DB 06775 AAAA 01 (example) Factory Technical Code + ICS

A Factory Technical Code + ICS, bar code 128

Logistical Item 3DB 06775 AAXX (example) Logistical Item for Customer

B Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128

S/N CW 050609001 (example) Factory Serial number

C Factory Serial number bar code 128

D (shown numbers as examples) – the field “Shifter MHz” indicates the possible frequency bands that can be used with this branching assembly. The choice between different shifters is done byCraft Terminal;

– for each “Shifter MHz”, the TX “LOW” and “HIGH” rows indicate the frequency range assumed by transceiver TX section, accord-ing to the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling.

Figure 131. Label affixed inside the MPT-HC BRANCHING box

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1178/308

4.2.4.3 How to change polarization in the MPT-HC

4.2.4.3.1 11-38 GHz MPT-HC

1 2

3

Remove the plastic protection cap from the MPT-HC.

Change the polarization of the MPT-HC, if required (default: vertical polarization).To rotate the polarization use the Allen wrench.

Horizontal polarization.

Protection cover

Unscrew the 2 screwsand rotate by 45°

The polarization must be changed to match the antenna polarization and the coupler nose waveguide.

The polarization must be turned to horizontal when assembling the MPT-HC on a coupler.

Note

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 179/308

4.2.4.3.2 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC

These MPT-HC have fixed polarization (vertical polarization). To change the polarization it is necessary to change the antenna polarization and to install the MPT-HC 90° rotated.

1 2Example of vertical polarization. Example of horizontal polarization.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1180/308

4.2.4.4 Types of Pole Mounting Installation kits

– Integrated antenna Pole Mounting Installation kits

– "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" Installation kits

4.2.4.4.1 Integrated antenna Pole Mounting Installation kits

These integrated antenna Pole Mounting kits are designed for quick mechanical installation, and:

– are included inside the chosen antenna kit.

– foresee the “Fine Tuning” for the positioning of the Antenna.

As shown in Figure 132., these integrated antenna Pole Mounting kits are supplied with the frequency-specific nose adapter for mounting the frequency-specific MPT-HC transceiver or RF Coupler.

In general, the nose adapter:

– in case of smallest antennas, is already mounted on the antenna

– in case of largest antennas, is supplied separately, and must be mounted on the antenna during the installation procedure.

Figure 132. Example of integrated antenna Pole Mounting (with antenna and nose adapter)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 181/308

4.2.4.4.2 "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" Installation kits

These kits are frequency independent, and provide only the mechanical support function. The frequency specialization is obtained mounting the frequency-specific nose adapter.

N.B.: The nose adapter shown is not included in the kit.

Figure 133. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" Installation kit (3DB10137AAXX)

4.2.4.5 Types of nose adapters

In case of:

– integrated antenna configurations, the nose adapter is delivered inside the chosen antenna kit; in this case the RF interface is used to attach the frequency-specific MPT-HC transceiver or RF Cou-pler.

– Non Integrated Antenna configurations, the nose adapter is used to attach:

• at one side, the frequency-specific MPT-HC transceiver or RF Coupler

• at the other side, to attach the Flextwist cable toward the antenna.

In these Non Integrated Antenna configurations, the nose adapter is delivered as individual item, and must be always mounted on the ODU or Coupler, during the installation procedure.

The mounting accessories are delivered with the nose adapter.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1182/308

4.2.4.6 1+0 MPT-HC installation (integrated antenna) - all frequencies

[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for MPT-HC with external diplexer).

[2] Install the Antenna and Pole Mounting.This pole mounting is delivered as “pole mounting”, “antenna”, and frequency-specific “nose adapter” already assembled. The integrated antenna is mounted on the pole front.Antenna and pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

[3] Check or change the polarization on the Antenna nose.To change the polarization, follow the instructions supplied with each antenna. Figure below shows an example.

N.B. The antennas are normally supplied with vertical polarization.

Figure 134. Example of antenna polarization change (“1+0” MPT-HC integrated antenna)

[4] Take off the solar shield from the MPT-HC transceiver by unscrewing the screws placed on the solar shield back panel.

[5] Install the MPT-HC on the Antenna nose adapter.

N.B. Before inserting the MPT-HC on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE grease on the O-ring.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 183/308

Putting silicone grease

Figure 135. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC insertion

1) Grasp the MPT-HC module by the handle.

2) Open the four looking hooks (1) arranged on the four walls of the MPT-HC unit.

3) For 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC only rotate the MPT-HC depending on the horizontal or vertical polar-ization, and slide it on the nose adapter.

4) Secure the MPT-HC module through the four hooks (1) on the relative brackets (2).

(1) Hook

(2) Bracket

Figure 136. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (11-38 GHz)

N.B. For 11-38 GHz MPT-HC remember to set first the correct polarization.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1184/308

(1) Hook

(2) Bracket

Figure 137. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz: vertical polarization)

(1) Hook

(2) Bracket

Figure 138. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz: horizontal polarization)

REMINDER: The MPT-HC/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the SHF flanges; the two ends are smooth. The O-ring seal around the male “nose” provides sealing.

[6] Ground the MPT-HC system.

[7] Pre-point the antenna.

[8] Reinstall the solar shield onto the MPT-HC transceiver by screwing on it the solar shield screws.

[9] Affix the EMF stickers.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 185/308

4.2.4.7 1+0 MPT-HC installation (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies

[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for MPT-HC with external diplexer).

[2] Install the Nose Adapter on the “Pole Mounting for Remote ODU”.

[3] Install the “Pole Mounting for Remote ODU”.Pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.In case of missing instructions, fix the U-bolts with 34 N x m tightening torque.

N.B. The pole mounting can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole depending on the azimuth and on the configuration of the tower.

Figure 139. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" installation

[4] Take off the solar shield from the MPT-HC transceiver by unscrewing the screws placed on the solar shield back panel.

[5] Install the MPT-HC.

N.B. Before inserting the MPT-HC on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE grease on the O-ring.


Figure 140. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC insertion

1) Grasp the MPT-HC module by the handle. Open the four looking hooks arranged on the four walls of the MPT-HC unit.

2) Position the Pole mounting support on the pole side as shown in the plant documentation.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1186/308

3) Position the MPT-HC and slide it on the nose adapter.

4) Secure the MPT-HC module through the four hooks onto the relative brackets.

Figure 141. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (11-38 GHz with pole mounting P/N 3DB 10137 AAAB)

Figure 142. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz with pole mounting P/N 3DB10137AAXX)

[6] Install the external Antenna with its own Pole Mounting.The installation of the antenna and of its own pole mounting, as well as the antenna polarization check/change, must be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

[7] Connect the antenna side (flange) of the Pole Mounting’s nose adapter to the external antenna, by means of the “Flextwist“ waveguide.

[8] Ground the MPT-HC system.


[10] Reinstall the solar shield onto the MPT-HC transceiver by screwing on it the solar shield screws.


User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 187/308

4.2.4.8 How to pull up the cables from indoor to the MPT-HC

4.2.4.8.1 Optical fiber

1 2

3 4

Take the optical fiber cable of the suitable length.

Take the Hoisting grip tool.

Insert the fiber in the hoisting grip tool.

5 6Screw the gland body to the hoisting grip until the end of stroke with a fixed spanner.

7 8 Fix the gland nut with the dynamometric wrench (10N).

Gland nutGland body

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1188/308

9 10Take a cord and insert it in the hoisting grip tool.

Make a knot on the cord and pull up with the cord the hoisting grip tool.

11 The overlength of the optical fiber must be rolled up in the Cable overlength box.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 189/308

4.2.4.8.2 Electrical Ethernet cable

N.B. The cable must be terminated on field.

N.B. Install the gland before terminating the cable.

3 4

5 6

Take the terminated electrical cable and protect the RJ45 with a tape.

Take a 35 cm reference on the cable.

1 Inser the gland on the cable: first insert the gland nut, then the gland seal, last the gland body.

Terminate the Ethernet cable with the RJ45 connector (1AB074610027) according to the plug assembling instructions included in the relevant tool provided in the Special tool bag (3CC50098AAAA).

2

Gland body Gland seal Gland nut

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1190/308

7 8Sign 1.5 cm from the reference. Sign 3 cm from the reference.

9 10Remove the sheath of the cable from 1.5 cm to 3 cm from the reference.

Insert the cable in the hoisting grip tool.

11 12Insert the cable in the hoisting grip tool. Screw the gland body to the hoisting grip until the end of stroke with a fixed spanner.

Gland body

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 191/308

Make a knot on the cord and pull up with the cord the hoisting grip tool.

17

Take a cord and insert it in the hoisting grip tool.

13 14

15 16

Gland nut

Fix the gland nut with the dynamometric wrench (10N).

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1192/308

4.2.4.9 Cable connection to MPT-HC (11-38 GHz)

4.2.4.9.1 Electrical cable installation

1 2

3 4

5 6

Remove the cap on the left side. Take a 35 cm reference on the cable and put a tape as reference length.

Insert the cable on the hole. Take the gland body, move it on the hole.

Glandbody

Fix the gland body until the end of stroke and push the seal in its seat.

Fix the gland nut by the hand.

Remove

Glandnut

Glandbody

Seal Reference

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 193/308

Make a loop on the cable.

Remove the tape from the RJ45 connector. 10

11

Climp the yellow boot on the cable.

Put the boot on the RJ45 connector. 12

9

Boot

7 8Pull back the cable until the reference is visible near the gland nut.

Tighten the body and then the gland nut with the dynamometric wrench (10 N).

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1194/308

15 End of cable connection.

13 14 Connect the RJ45 connector on the MPT-HC connector and close the co-box.

Position of the cable with loop.

Warning: The Power Supply connection must be made waterproof:

1) Surround the connector with the auto amalgamate tape from up to down

2) Surround the connector with the adhesive tape from up to down

3) Put tie raps on the up and the down of the connector

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 195/308

4.2.4.9.2 Optical fiber cable installation

1 2

3 4

5 6

Insert the SFP on the MPT-HC. Insert the optical fiber on the hole.

Gland

Fix the gland body.Take the gland body and move it on the hole.

Tighten the gland nut with the dynamometric wrench.

Remove the protection caps from the fiber connectors.

Warning: The end of the heat-shrink tube reference must be outside the gland.

Reference

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1196/308

7 8

9

Take the optical conectors and ... ... connect them on the MPT-HC. Close the co-box.

End of optical fiber connection.

Warning: The Power Supply connection must be made waterproof:

1) Surround the connector with the auto amalgamate tape from up to down

2) Surround the connector with the adhesive tape from up to down

3) Put tie raps on the up and the down of the connector

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 197/308

4.2.4.10 Cable connection to MPT-HC (6-7-8 GHz)

4.2.4.10.1 Electrical cable installation

1 2

3 4

6

Open the co-box.

Move the gland nut and tighten it with the dynamometric wrench.

End of cable connection.5 Insert the yellow boot on the RJ45 connector and insert it in the co-box. Close the co-box.

Remove the cap from “User” and insert the cable on the hole. Tighten the gland body with the dynamometric wrench.

User

Gland nut

Take a 29 cm reference on the cable and put a tape as reference length.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1198/308

4.2.4.10.2 Optical fiber cable installation

1 2

3 4

5 6

Open the co-box. Insert the SFP module.

Move the gland body and tighten it with the dynamometric wrench.

Remove the cap from “User” and insert the optical fiber on the hole.

Tighten the gland nut with the dynamometric wrench.

Remove the protection caps from the fiber connectors, insert them in the SFP. Close the co-box.

Warning: The reference must be outside the co-box and the gland nut.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 199/308

7 End of optical fiber connection.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1200/308

4.2.4.11 Installing the “Flextwist“ waveguide (not integrated antenna cases)

Concerning the interface between the MPT-HC output flange and the suggested antenna flange, the fol-lowing Table 18. details for each product the standard wave guide to be used and the suggested flange for the external antenna.

Please note that the use of 600 mm flex twist is not suggested for antennas bigger than 3ft (90 cm diam-eter), due to mechanical reasons. The suggested way to make the RF connection is to use the elliptical wave guide fitted with flanged connectors.

Table 18. MPT-HC Output flanges with external antenna

Range (GHz)

MPT-HC Output Flange

FLEXTWIST Suggested Antenna Flange

C.E.I. E.I.A.

6 UBR70 R70 WR137 PDR70 UDR70 PDR70

7-8

UDR84 R84 WR112 PDR84 UBR84 PBR84

or

UBR84 R84 WR112 PBR84 UBR84 PBR84

11 UBR100 R100 WR90 PBR100 UBR100 PBR100



18

UBR220 R220 WR42 PBR220 UBR220 PBR22023

26


The long twistable flexible waveguide is supplied complete with gaskets and fasteners. At one end, it has a smooth square or rectangular flange (to be mounted on the antenna) and at the other end, a grooved square flange designed to accommodate an O–ring seal (mounted at the MPT-HC end).

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 201/308

Table 19. 6-7-8GHz Flextwist waveguide

FLEXIBLE TWISTABLE WAVEGUIDE KIT

Alc

atel

-Luc

ent c

ode

Wav

egui

de

Leng

th m

m.

Freq

. Ban

d G

Hz

Flan

ges

Stai

nles

s st

eel

sock

et c

ap s

crew

s

Stai

nles

s st

eel

sock

et c

ap s

crew

s

“Ond

ufle

x” s

prin

gy

crin

kle

was

hers

Stai

nles

s Z.

fla

t was

hers

HM

. Hex

nut

s

1AF02951ABAA WR137 1000 6 PDR70 UDR70 8 (M4x25)

8 (M4x12)

8 (B4)

8 (Z4)

8 (HM4)

3CC08010ABAB WR112 1000 7,05–10 PBR84 UBR84 8 (M4x25)

8 (M4x12)

8 (B4)

8 (Z4)

8 (HM4)

Table 20. 11-38GHz Flextwist waveguide

FLEXIBLE TWISTABLE WAVEGUIDE KIT

Alc

atel

-Luc

ent c

ode

Wav

egui

de

Leng

th m

m.

Freq

. Ban

d G

Hz

Flan

ges

Stai

nles

s st

eel

sock

et c

ap s

crew

s

Stai

nles

s st

eel

sock

et c

ap s

crew

s

“Ond

ufle

x” s

prin

gy

crin

kle

was

hers

Stai

nles

s Z.

fla

t was

hers

HM

. Hex

nut

s

1AF02957ABAA WR90 1000 11 PBR100 UBR100 8 (M4x20)

8 (M4x12)

8 (B4)

12 (Z4)

12 (HM4)

3CC05751ACAA WR75 600 10 – 15,0 PBR120 UBR120 8 (M4x20)

8 (M4x12)

8 (B4)

12 (Z4)

12 (HM4)

3CC05750ACAA WR62 600 12,4 – 18 PBR140 UBR140 8 (M4x20)

8 (M4x12)

8 (B4)

8 (Z4)

8 (HM4)

3CC05749ACAA WR42 600 18 – 26,5 PBR220 UBR220 8 (M3x20)

8 (M3x12)

8 (B3)

8 (Z3)

8 (HM3)

3DB00682AAAA WR28 600 26,5 – 40 PBR320 UBR320 8 (M3x20)

8 (M3x12)

8 (B3)

8 (Z3)

8 (HM3)

N.B. If the FLEX–TWIST is not provided by Alcatel, the user must carefully choose the type of the connection guide in order to limit as much as possible galvanic couples between ANTENNA/flex–twist and flex–twist/MPT-HC contact surfaces that can induce rust. For this purpose please note that the surfaces are:

– chromium-plated at MPT-HC output flange side

– tin-plated at flex-twist’s flange side

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1202/308

4.2.4.12 MPT-HC system grounding

Each MPT-HC transceiver must be individually grounded.

N.B. Neither the RF coupler, nor the antenna(s), integrated or not integrated, must be grounded.

The following items are necessary for the individual grounding of each MPT-HC transceiver:

– one MPT-HC Grounding Kit (P/N 3CC08166AAXX). This kit corresponds to a cable (16mm2) that must be cut on site and connected to the terminal pro-vided on the MPT-HC transceiver, and, on the other side, to the nearest grounding plate;

This example figure shows the grounding connector position.

MPT-HC grounding connector:to be connected with thegrounding cable to the nearestgrounding plate

Connect all grounding cables to the nearest grounding plate, as shown in this example:

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 203/308

4.2.4.13 Cable Grounding

The Power Supply cable and the Ethernet electrical cable must be grounded by using the dedicated Grounding kits.

For ground kit installation instructions refer to the guide provided with each kit.

For tower/mast installations the cables must be grounded at:

– The point where it comes on to the tower from the MPT-HC

– The point where it leaves the tower to go to the equipment building

– Not more than 25 m intervals on the tower if the height on the tower exceeds 50 m

– A point just prior to building entry

Figure 143. shows typical tower locations for cable grounding.

At non-standard installations, such as building tops or the sides of buildings, follow the same general guidelines but where proper grounding points are not provided these must first be installed.

MPT & antenna

Cable ground

MPT ODU ground wire

Cable ground Cable ground

Cable carrier

ground bar

Site grounding

Rack ground bar

Cable supported by black cable ties at not more than 1 m intervals. Must not run adjacent to tower lightning ground or electrical cables

Install additional cable grounds at not more than 25 m intervals if the height of cable on the tower exceeds 50 m

Figure 143. Locations for Cable Grounds

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1204/308

4.2.4.14 Type N connectors and Grounding kits waterproofing on the IDU/ODU cables

For installation on the type N connectors and grounding kits please refer to the installation notice provided with the connector and the grounding kit.

IMPORTANT:

To prevent potential risks of dysfunction it is recommended and a particular attention will be carried in the realization of the waterproofing of connectings (see following page).For the holding in the bad weather, do not forget the waterproofing at the end of the operation with the Self auto-amalgamating + UV protection vinyl tape by necklaces Colson / Tie raps in every extremity.For the assembly between the cable, grounding kit and ODU realized outside, it is recommended to use the Self auto-amalgamating (several turns) to assure the waterproofing. Then to cover the set by the UV protection vinyl tape to avoid the unsticking of the self-amalgamating and ended with a necklace Colson / Tie raps.

4.2.4.14.1 Example of Connector N waterproofing

4.2.4.14.2 Example of N Connector & Waterproofing

The principle of waterproofing given above is valid for the connections cable / ODU and for the grounding kits of the coaxial cable. It is recommended to make this waterproofing by "dry" weather, to avoid locking the humidity into the system.

Surround the connector with the adhesive UV tape from up to down

Surround the connector with the auto amalgamate tape from up to down

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 205/308

Put necklace Colson / tie raps on the up and the down of the connector

4.2.4.14.3 Example of Grounding Kit & Waterproofing

In every kit for Power Supply cable and in every kit for Ethernet electrical cable is joined a detailed assem-bling instruction.

Make then the Installation of the kit on the coaxial cable by not forgetting the waterproofing as example below.

Example of realization. Detail of the waterproofing of the kit.

Metal contact

Install grounding kit

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1206/308

Waterproofing with Almagamating + UV protection vinyl tape + Necklace Colson / Tie rap

Thighten with allen key 8 mm

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 207/308

4.2.5 MPT-MC Installation

The MPT-MC installation section is divided in:

– Types of MPT-MC (par. 4.2.5.1 on page 209)

– MPT-MC operative information (par. 4.2.5.2 on page 210)

– How to change polarization in the MPT-MC (par. 4.2.5.3 on page 217)

– Types of Pole Mounting Installation kits (par. 4.2.5.4 on page 218)

– Types of nose adapters (par. 4.2.5.5 on page 218)

– 1+0 MPT-MC installation (integrated antenna) - all frequencies (par. 4.2.5.6 on page 219)

– 1+0 MPT-MC installation (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies (par. 4.2.5.7 on page 222)

– How to terminate the Ethernet cable (MPT-MC side) and to pull up it from Indoor to MPT-MC (par. 4.2.5.8 on page 224)

– Installing the “Flextwist“ waveguide (not integrated antenna cases) (par. 4.2.5.9 on page 227)

– MPT-MC system grounding (par. 4.2.5.10 on page 227)

– Cable Grounding (par. 4.2.5.11 on page 227)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1208/308

4.2.5.1 Types of MPT-MC

The MPT-MC consists of one or two cabinets including the Ethernet interface + modem + RF transceiver + branching of a channel.

Two mechanical solutions are adopted:

[1] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation (6 GHz and 11 GHz to 38 GHz), shown in Figure 144., where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-MC cabinet; this type of MPT-MC is identified by one Logistical Item only;

[2] with external diplexer: due to an high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of the shifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), shown in Figure 145., where MPT-MC is composed by two independent units: the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the RF TRANS-CEIVER assembly (containing the RF section); each of this type of MPT-MC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly and another for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

TRANSCEIVER + BRANCHING

Figure 144. Views of MPT-MC with embedded diplexer (6 and 11-38 GHz)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 209/308

Figure 145. Views of MPT-MC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)

4.2.5.2 MPT-MC operative information

This paragraph gives operative information, for installation regarding:

– MPT-MC with embedded or external diplexer herebelow

– MPT-MC with external diplexer (additional information) on page 212

4.2.5.2.1 Operative information on MPT-MC with embedded or external diplexer

4.2.5.2.1.1 General, views and access points

Figure 146. on page 211 (for MPT-MC with embedded diplexer) and Figure 147. on page 211 (for MPT-MC with external diplexer) show MPT-MC views and access points.

The external interfaces are listed in Table 21. below, with the corresponding connector.

Table 21. MPT-MC external interfaces

Ref. in Figure 146.

and Figure 147.

Interface Connector Further information

(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler waveguide Table 22. herebelow

(2) Ethernet electrical cable R2CT

Table 22. RF interface

FREQUENCY GHz -> 6 7 8 11 13-15 18-26 38

Waveguide type -> WR137 WR112 WR112 WR75 WR62 WR42 WR28

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1210/308

(1) (A)

(A)(A)

(A)

(2)

(A) Locking hooks (4) to fix/unfix MPT-MC assembly to antenna or coupler

(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler. Remove the plastic cover.WARNING: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-MC. It must never be removed.

Figure 146. Views of MPT-MC with embedded diplexer (6 and 11-38 GHz)

(1) (A)

(A)(A)

(A)

(B)(B)

(B)(B)(2)


(B) 4 locking hooks to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to antenna or coupler

(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler. Remove the plastic cover.WARNING: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-MC. It must never be removed.

Figure 147. Views of MPT-MC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 211/308

4.2.5.2.2 Additional operative information on MPT-MC with external diplexer

4.2.5.2.2.1 MPT-MC composition

As shown in Figure 148., the MPT-MC assembly is made up of two boxes, one for diplexer system (BRANCHING) and the other for the all other active functions (TRANSCEIVER) connected together to form the MPT-MC.

An O-RING present in the TRANSCEIVER box guarantees the MPT-MC assembly waterproofness.

N.B. This is a conductive O-RING and must be left dry. Do not wet it with silicon grease (silicon grease must be used only on O-ring between MPT-MC and antenna).

BRANCHING TRANSCEIVER

WARNING 1 WARNING 2

Figure 148. Composition of MPT-MC with external diplexer

WARNING 1: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-MC. It must never be removed.

WARNING 2: This gasket must never be removed.

The TRANSCEIVER box performs all the functions, but does not include the diplexer system.

The BRANCHING box provides the interface between the pole mounting/antenna and the TRANS-CEIVER.

The favorite solution foresees the possibility to change in field a spare part TRANSCEIVER without dis-connecting the BRANCHING box from the pole mounting/antenna. The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCH-ING boxes fixing and unfixing are obtained through the four levers.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1212/308

4.2.5.2.2.2 TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling

Figure 149. below shows the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces:

– (A) BRANCHING box label informative contentdescribed in Figure 152. on page 216

– (B) (HIGH FREQ) and (C) (LOW FREQ) RF interfaces on BRANCHING box

– (D) (TX) and (E) (RX) RF interfaces on TRANSCEIVER box

The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes can be coupled in two alternative ways (180°-rotated with respect to each other):

– BRANCHING box (B) (HIGH FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX)in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the HIGH frequency range of the Shifter set by the Craft Terminal (see field D in Figure 152. on page 216); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the corresponding LOW frequency range;

– BRANCHING box (C) (LOW FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX)in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the LOW frequency range of the Shifter set by the Craft Terminal (see field D in Figure 152. on page 216); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the corresponding HIGH frequency range.

(A) (B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

Figure 149. MPT-MC TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces

N.B. There is only one possible way to couple the BRANCHING box and the TRANSCEIVER box: there is a mistake-proofing put by the factory on the TRANSCEIVER box, whose position depends on the type of transceiver (low or high band, as shown in Figure 150.) to ensure that the association with the BRANCHING box is always the right one.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 213/308

Hole

Mistake-proofing

Figure 150. 7-8 GHz MPT-MC BRANCHING box mistake-proofing

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1214/308

4.2.5.2.3 Labels affixed on the MPT-MC

a) The label depicted in Figure 151. below is affixed externally to all types of MPT-MC and MPT-MC TRANSCEIVER boxes;

b) Only for MPT-MC with external diplexers, an additional label, depicted in Figure 152. on page 216, is placed on the branching assembly.


9500-MPR Equipment Acronym & Alcatel-Lucent Logo




-28 V / -58 V 1,6 A / 0,8 A Power supply range and current range

Logistical Item (shown numbers as examples) Logistical Item for Customer

A Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128

Serial n° (shown numbers as examples) Factory Serial number

B Factory Serial number bar code 128

TX Frequency MHz (shown numbers as examples) Working frequency range

Shifter MHz (shown numbers as examples) Shifter

TX Sub-band (shown numbers as examples) TX Sub-band

Initial SW/ICS (shown numbers as examples) P/N and ICS of the software loaded in factory

PN/ICS (shown numbers as examples) Factory P/N + ICS

C Factory P/N + ICS bar code 128

Figure 151. Label affixed on the MPT-MC and MPT-MC TRANSCEIVER box

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 215/308

N.B. In the label A9400 is written because the diplexers are also used in A9400 AWY.


A9400 Equipment Acronym & Alcatel-Lucent Logo


12345 (example) Notified body



PN/ICS 3DB 06775 AAAA 01 (example) Factory Technical Code + ICS

A Factory Technical Code + ICS, bar code 128

Logistical Item 3DB 06775 AAXX (example) Logistical Item for Customer

B Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128

S/N CW 050609001 (example) Factory Serial number

C Factory Serial number bar code 128

D (shown numbers as examples) – the field “Shifter MHz” indicates the possible frequency bands that can be used with this branching assembly. The choice between different shifters is done byCraft Terminal;

– for each “Shifter MHz”, the TX “LOW” and “HIGH” rows indicate the frequency range assumed by transceiver TX section, accord-ing to the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling.

Figure 152. Label affixed inside the MPT-MC BRANCHING box

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1216/308

4.2.5.3 How to change polarization in the MPT-MC

4.2.5.3.1 6 and 11-38 GHz MPT-MC

1 2

3

Remove the plastic protection cover from the MPT-MC.

Change the polarization of the MPT-MC, if required (default: vertical polarization).To rotate the polarization use the Allen wrench.

Horizontal polarization.

Protection cover

Unscrew the 2 screwsand rotate by 45°

Polarizationreference

Polarizationreference

The polarization must be changed to match the antenna polarization and the coupler nose waveguide.

Note

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 217/308

4.2.5.3.2 7-8 GHz MPT-MC

These MPT-MC have fixed polarization (vertical polarization). To change the polarization it is necessary to change the antenna polarization and to install the MPT-MC 90° rotated.

1 2Example of vertical polarization (left offset). Example of horizontal polarization (left offset).

3 4Example of vertical polarization (right offset).

Example of horizontal polarization (right offset).

4.2.5.4 Types of Pole Mounting Installation kits

Refer to paragraph 4.2.4.4 on page 181.

4.2.5.5 Types of nose adapters


User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1218/308

4.2.5.6 1+0 MPT-MC installation (integrated antenna) - all frequencies

[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for MPT-MC with external diplexer).

[2] Install the Antenna and Pole Mounting.This pole mounting is delivered as “pole mounting”, “antenna”, and frequency-specific “nose adapter” already assembled. The integrated antenna is mounted on the pole front.Antenna and pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

[3] Check or change the polarization on the Antenna nose.To change the polarization, follow the instructions supplied with each antenna. Figure below shows an example.

N.B. The antennas are normally supplied with vertical polarization.

Figure 153. Example of antenna polarization change (“1+0” MPT-MC integrated antenna)

[4] Take off the solar shield from the MPT-MC transceiver by unscrewing the screws placed on the solar shield back panel.

[5] Install the MPT-MC on the Antenna nose adapter.

N.B. Before inserting the MPT-MC on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE grease on the O-ring.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 219/308


Figure 154. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-MC insertion

1) Grasp the MPT-MC module by the handle.

2) Open the four looking hooks (1) arranged on the four walls of the MPT-MC unit.

3) For 7-8 GHz MPT-MC only rotate the MPT-MC depending on the horizontal or vertical polar-ization, and slide it on the nose adapter.

4) Secure the MPT-MC module through the four hooks (1) on the relative brackets (2).

(1) Hook

(2) Bracket

Figure 155. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6 GHz and 11-38 GHz)

N.B. For 6 GHz and 11-38 GHz MPT-MC remember to set first the correct polarization.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1220/308

(1) Hook

(2) Bracket

Figure 156. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (7-8 GHz: vertical polarization)

(1) Hook

(2) Bracket

Figure 157. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (7-8 GHz: horizontal polarization)

REMINDER: The MPT-MC/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the SHF flanges; the two ends are smooth. The O-ring seal around the male “nose” provides sealing.

[6] Ground the MPT-MC system.


[8] Reinstall the solar shield onto the MPT-MC transceiver by screwing on it the solar shield screws.


User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 221/308

4.2.5.7 1+0 MPT-MC installation (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies

[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for MPT-MC with external diplexer).

[2] Install the Nose Adapter on the “Pole Mounting for Remote ODU”.

[3] Install the “Pole Mounting for Remote ODU”.Pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.In case of missing instructions, fix the U-bolts with 34 N x m tightening torque.

N.B. The pole mounting can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole depending on the azimuth and on the configuration of the tower.

Figure 158. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" installation

[4] Take off the solar shield from the MPT-MC transceiver by unscrewing the screws placed on the solar shield back panel.

[5] Install the MPT-MC.

N.B. Before inserting the MPT-MC on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE grease on the O-ring.


Figure 159. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-MC insertion

1) Grasp the MPT-MC module by the handle. Open the four looking hooks arranged on the four walls of the MPT-MC unit.

2) Position the Pole mounting support on the pole side as shown in the plant documentation.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1222/308

3) Position the MPT-MC and slide it on the nose adapter.

4) Secure the MPT-MC module through the four hooks onto the relative brackets.

Figure 160. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (with pole mounting P/N 3DB 10137 AAAB)

[6] Install the external Antenna with its own Pole Mounting.The installation of the antenna and of its own pole mounting, as well as the antenna polarization check/change, must be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

[7] Connect the antenna side (flange) of the Pole Mounting’s nose adapter to the external antenna, by means of the “Flextwist“ waveguide.

[8] Ground the MPT-MC system.


[10] Reinstall the solar shield onto the MPT-MC transceiver by screwing on it the solar shield screws.


User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 223/308

4.2.5.8 How to terminate the Ethernet cable (MPT-MC side) and to pull up it from Indoor to MPT-MC

To terminate the cable the Short kit plug R2CT must be used.

The kit is made up of 10 items as shown in Figure 162.

Figure 161. Short kit plug R2CT

Figure 162. Short kit plug R2CT items

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1224/308

To terminate and to connect the cable to the MPT-MC follow the instructions:

1 2Turn and remove the protection cap. Unscrew partially the nut spiral.

3 Pass the cable through the mini short kit plug and crimp the RJ45 plug according to the standardprocedure

4 5Insert the RJ45 plug inside the unlocking clip (keep attention to have the latches mechanisms on the same side )

Pull the cable and insert the unlocking clip together with the RJ45 plug inside the body,

the latches being aligned with the body bayonet pin. Place the body arm on the left side.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 225/308

6 If you need to hoist the assembly, pull the coupling nut so as to cover the plug body and put back the protection cap on

9 10Align the two marks on the plug body and the receptacle, insert and rotate clockwise the plug body into the receptacle

Connect the RJ45 plug to its socket by pushing the cable.

7 Tighten the nut spiral with a 21 mm wrench with a torque of 3N.m mini and 3,5 maxi. The cable is now fixed with the plug and ready to be pulled.

8 Install the cable then unscrew partially the nut spiral and remove the protection cap to connect to the receptacle

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1226/308

11 Secure the assembly by screwing the nut spiral with a 21mm wrench with a torque of 3 N.m mini and 3,5 N.m maxi

12Push and rotate clockwise the coupling nut until secured onto the receptacle

4.2.5.9 Installing the “Flextwist“ waveguide (not integrated antenna cases)


4.2.5.10 MPT-MC system grounding


4.2.5.11 Cable Grounding


User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 227/308

4.2.6 Power Extractor

With the Power Extractor, to be installed close to the MPT-HC, the interconnection between the MSS and the MPT-HC can be made with a single electrical Ethernet cable by using the “Power Feed over Ethernet” solution (Ethernet traffic and Power Supply on the same cable). The Power Extractor then separates the Power Supply from the Ethernet traffic, which are separately sent to the MPT-HC.

The two cables, interconnecting the Power Extractor to the MPT-HC (the Power Supply cable to be con-nected to the DC Out connector of the Power Extractor and Ethernet cable to be connected to the Data Out connector of the Power Extractor), are provided, already terminated (2 m long), with the Power Extractor itself.

To prepare and to terminate the “Ethernet data + Power Supply” cable (to be connected to MSS and to the DC+Data In connector of the Power Extractor) follow the instructions given in para. 4.2.5.8 on page 224.

The R2CT connector used to terminate the cable (Power Extractor side) is provided with the Power Extractor.

3 4Connect the 3 cables (2 cables to the MPT-HC and 1 cable to the MSS).

The final installation is shown in the figure.

1 Install the Power Extractor on the pole close to the MPT-HC.

Connect the Power Extractor to the ground by using the 6 mm2 grounding cable pro-vided with the Power Extractor.

2

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1228/308

4.2.7 Indoor Installation

This section includes:

– Indoor accessories (par. 4.2.7.1 on page 229)

– Indoor cables (par. 4.2.7.2 on page 230)

– Accessories and cables for MPT-HC connections (par. 4.2.7.3 on page 230)

– Accessories and cables for MPT-MC connections (par. 4.2.7.4 on page 232)

– Nose Adapter for MPT-HC and MPT-MC (par. 4.2.7.5 on page 232)

– Flextwists for MPT-HC and MPT-MC (par. 4.2.7.6 on page 233)

– Ethernet Electrical Cables (par. 4.2.7.7 on page 233)

– Ethernet Optical Cables (par. 4.2.7.8 on page 233)

– E1 Connectors on the front panel of the MSS-1c (par. 4.2.7.9 on page 235)

4.2.7.1 Indoor accessories

1AD137820001 TRU: Power Distribution with 1 Input 48VDC and 6 breakers 16A

1AD137830001 TRU: Power Distribution with 1 Input 48VDC and 12 breakers 16A

3CC50042AAAA ETSI Rack mounting kit (valid for TRU 1AD137820001, TRU 1AD137830001, support 19" module 120 ohm 3CC07810AAAA)

3CC07810AAAA Distributor subrack for 120 ohm EMC (Panel 3U)

3CC08061AAAA Connector support 1.6/5.6 75 ohm (Panel 1U)

3CC08061ABAA Connector support BNC 75 ohm (Panel 1U)

1AD114560001 Laborack (19" rack)

3DB04656AAAA ETSI rack (H2200 21" rack)

3DB18171ABAA DIN Bracket

3DB18159ABAA ETSI bracket

3CC13424AAAA Rack grounding kit

3CC06503AAAA Consumable kit

1AF15185AAAA IP Phone

3CC50065AAAA Adaptor bracket kit 1U ETSI (valid for 3CC08062AAAA, 3CC08061AAAA, 3CC08061ABAA)

3DB77052AAXX Bracket (for one MSS-1c left/right mounting)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 229/308

4.2.7.2 Indoor cables

1AC041800001 24V DC 3G power supply cable (2x16mm2) (from Station battery to TRU)

1AC007800068 MSS-1c power supply cable 2x1mm2

3CC52183AAXX Cable 8XE1 MSS-1c-DISTRIBUTOR 120 ohm L = 1m 45° (37 pin)

3CC52182AAXX Cable 8XE1 MSS-1c-DISTRIBUTOR 75 ohm 1.5/5.6 L = 1m 45° (37 pin)

3CC52181AAXX Cable 8XE1 MSS-1c-DISTRIBUTOR 75 ohm BNC L = 1m 45° (37 pin)

3CC50152AAXX Cable 8xE1 MSS-1c-DISTRIBUTOR 75 ohm coax Free L = 15m (37 pin)

3CC50151AAXX Cable 8xE1 MSS-1c-DISTRIBUTOR 120 ohm Free Wires L = 10m (37 pin)

3CC52015AAXX Cable, Trib E1, RJ45 to wire-wrap L = 5m

3CC52020AAXX RJ45 to RJ45 E1 cross-over cable

4.2.7.3 Accessories and cables for MPT-HC connections

3DB77008ACXX Bracket (for one MSS-1c + one FAN unit or two MSS-1c mounting)

3CC50065AAAA Kit 21”

1AC001100022 Coax cable 50 ohm (diam.=10.3 mm) for L>200 m

1AB095530023 Conn. male straigth 50 ohm (diam.=10.3 mm)

1AB128500002 Cable grounding kit (diam.=10.3 mm)

1AC041350001 Coax. cable 50 ohm (diam.=6.85 mm) for L<200 m

1AB095530036 N Conn. Male straigth 50 ohm for coax. cable (diam.=6.85 mm)

1AD040130004 Grounding kit for coax. cable (diam.=6.85 mm)

1AC016760006 IDU-ODU Ethernet cable Cat5e shield 80% for outdoor environment

1AB074610027 RJ45 connector (boot included)

1AD160490001 Tool for HIROSE RJ45 IDU-ODU cable assembling

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1230/308

1AB150990002 Short kit plug R2CT

1AF17000AAAA Hoisting protection tube (for ethernet or fiber cord)

1AD040130004 Grounding kit for RJ45 Ethernet electrical cable

3CC08166AAXX ODU Grounding kit

3CC52160ALAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection80m pre-assembled fiber cable + gland

3CC52160AAAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection100m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland

3CC52160ABAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection120m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland

3CC52160ACAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection140m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland

3CC52160ADAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection160m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland

3CC52160AEAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection180m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland

3CC52160AFAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection200m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland

3CC52160AGAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection220m pre-assembled fiber able+ gland

3CC52160AHAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection250m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland

3CC52160AIAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection300m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland

3CC50097AAXX Cable overlength box (wall and pipe mounting only)

1AD161130001 Dynamometric wrench for Gland 20mm (10N)

1AD161030001 Dynamometric wrench for ODC

1AB383760001 Optical SFP - MPR/MPT

3CC50098AAXX MPR-MPT tool bag (special tools)

3CC50099AAXX Standard tool bag

3CC50107AAXX Power Extractor (it includes the two 2 m jumpers for connection to MPT-HC, the R2CT connector to terminate the MSS-Power Extractor cable and the grounding kit)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 231/308

4.2.7.4 Accessories and cables for MPT-MC connections

1AC016760006 IDU-ODU Ethernet cable Cat5e shield 80% for outdoor environment

1AB074610027 RJ45 connector (boot included)

1AD160490001 Tool for HIROSE RJ45 IDU-ODU cable assembling

1AB150990002 R2CT connector

1AF17000AAAA Hoisting protection tube (for ethernet or fiber cord)

1AD040130004 Grounding kit for RJ45 Ethernet electrical cable

3CC08166AAXX ODU Grounding kit

3CC50098AAXX MPR-MPT tool bag (special tools)

3CC50099AAXX Standard tool bag

4.2.7.5 Nose Adapter for MPT-HC and MPT-MC

3DB01460AAXX 6 GHz Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)

3DB01459AAXX 7/8 GHz Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)

3CC50125AAXX 11 GHz Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)

1AB146090003 13 GHz Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)

1AB146090001 15 GHz Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)

1AB146090002 18/23/25 Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)

3DB02082AAXX 28/38 Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1232/308

4.2.7.6 Flextwists for MPT-HC and MPT-MC

1AF02951ABAA 6 GHz flextwist L = 1m (PDR-UDR)

1AF11977AAAA 7/8 GHz flextwist WR112 L = 1m (PDR84/UBR84)

3CC05751ACAA 11 GHz flextwist L = 0.6m



3CC05749ACAA 18/23/25 GHz flextwist L = 0.6m

3DB00682AAXX 28/38 GHz flextwist L = 0.6m

4.2.7.7 Ethernet Electrical Cables

3CC52141ABAA RJ45-RJ45 Eth. CAT5E shielded straight cable 5 m

3CC52141ACAA RJ45-RJ45 Eth. CAT5E shielded straight cable 15 m

4.2.7.8 Ethernet Optical Cables

The following multi-mode jumpers are available:

1AB214000016 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-LC L = 5m

1AB214000017 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-LC L = 10m

1AB240330033 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-FC L = 5m

1AB240330032 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-FC L = 10m

1AB200240003 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-SC L = 5m

1AB200240004 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-SC L = 10m

The following single-mode jumpers are available:

3CC52077AAAA Fiber 3M SM LC to LC



3CC52080AAAA Fiber 3M SM LC to FC


User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 233/308


3CC52083AAAA Fiber 3M SM LC to SC




3CC52088AAAA Fiber 5M, SM FC-SC

3CC52017AAAA Fiber 10M, SM FC-SC

3CC52023AAAA Fiber 3M, SM SC-SC



User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1234/308

4.2.7.9 E1 Connectors on the front panel of the MSS-1c

Table 23. Pin Function: Tributaries 1- 8

Pin Name Dir Description Pin Name Dir Description

1 20

2 In+ E1-1 Rx E1-1 Rx differential signal 21 In- E1-1 Rx E1-1 Rx differential signal








10 Ground 29

11 30 Out- E1-1 Tx E1-1 Tx differential signal

12 Out+ E1-1 Tx E1-1 Tx differential signal 31 Out- E1-2 Tx E1-2 Tx differential signal







19 Out+ E1-8 Tx E1-8 Tx differential signal

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 235/308

Table 24. Pin Function: Tributaries 9- 10

Pin Name Dir Description Pin Name Dir Description

1 20

2 In+ E1-9 Rx E1-1 Tx differential signal 21 In- E1-9 Rx E1-1 Rx differential signal

3 In+ E1-10 Rx E1-2 Tx differential signal 22 In- E1-10 Rx E1-2 Rx differential signal

4 23

5 24

6 25

7 26

8 27

9 28

10 Ground 29

11 30 Out- E1-9 Tx E1-1 Tx differential signal

12 Out+ E1-9 Tx E1-1 Rx differential signal 31 Out- E1-10 Tx E1-2 Tx differential signal

13 Out+ E1-10 Tx E1-2 Rx differential signal 32

14 33

15 34

16 35

17 36

18 37

19

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1236/308

4.2.8 Antenna Alignment

This section includes:

– Preparation (see par. 4.2.8.1 on page 237)

– Signal Measurement (see par. 4.2.8.2 on page 237)

– Aligning the Antenna (see par. 4.2.8.3 on page 240)

– Main Beams and Side Lobes (see par. 4.2.8.4 on page 244)

4.2.8.1 Preparation

Before aligning antennas ensure:

– The ODUs are powered up at both ends of the link.

– Transmit and receive frequencies are correctly set.

– Transmit powers are correctly set and transmit mute is turned off.

If frequency and/or power settings are not correct for the application, interference may be caused to other links in the same geographical area.

4.2.8.2 Signal Measurement

Two receive signal-strength indicators are provided to assist antenna alignment, RSL in the Performance screen, and the RSSI voltage at LEMO connector on the MPT-HC. Refer to:

– Using RSL Data (see par. 4.2.8.2.1 on page 237)

– Using the RSSI Voltage at the MPT-HC (see par. 4.2.8.2.2 on page 238)

– RSL Measurement Guidelines (see par. 4.2.8.2.2.1 on page 240)

4.2.8.2.1 Using RSL Data

As MCT is accessed via connection to the MSS, a separate means of communication such as two-way radio or cell phone is required between the MCT operator and the person at the antenna.

To align using RSL:

1) Monitor RSL in the MCT Performance screen.

2) Set antenna alignment for maximum RSL.

Note

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 237/308

3) Repeat for the far end of the link.

4) Compare actual RSLs with the expected RSLs from the link installation datapack. RSL mea-surement accuracies:

a) ± 2 dB for levels -40 to -70 dBm, over a temperature range of 0 to +35°C.

b) ±4 dB for levels -25 to -85 dBm, over an extended -33 to +55°C range.

4.2.8.2.2 Using the RSSI Voltage at the MPT-HC/MPT-MC

A voltmeter, such as a multimeter, is used to measure RSSI voltage.

Use the MPT/AWY Service Cord for the power monitoring in addition to a voltmeter.

1) Connect a voltmeter to the MPT-HC/MPT-MC through the MPT/AWY Service Cord.

2) Adjust antenna alignment until the voltage reading is at maximum value.

3) Repeat for the far end of the link.

Check and record the peak voltage at each end. The RSSI voltage provides a direct relationship with RSL, as follows:

Units Measurement (with MPT-HC/MPT-MC)

Service kit cable (Vdc) 5 4.71 4.12 3.5 2.9 2.3 1.71 1.11 0.59 0.14

RSL (dBm) -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100

4) Compare actual RSLs to the expected RSLs from the link installation datapack. Refer to par. 4.2.8.2.2.1 - RSL Measurement Guidelines.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1238/308

MPT/AWY Service Cord operative information

Figure 163. herebelow shows this optional cable (P/N 3CC52191AAXX):

LEMO wire 6 = ground

Connection table

Signal M1 M2 M3 M4

ETH_TXP_T 1 3

ETH_TXN_T 2 6

GND 3 X

ETH_RXP_T 4 1

ETH_RXN_T 5 2

PRX_OUT 12 X

Figure 163. MPT/AWY Service Cord

Connector usage:

– (M1) LEMO connector, to be plugged into LEMO connector on MPT-HC/MPT-MC.

– banana plugs (M3) and (M4): output is a 0 to +5V DC voltage proportional to the radio Rx field. Duringequipment line–up, through a multi–meter it is possible to easily point the antenna until the measuredvoltage is the maximum, corresponding to the maximum radio Rx field.

– (M2) RJ45 connector, to connect the MCT directly to the MPT.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 239/308

4.2.8.2.2.1 RSL Measurement Guidelines

RSSI/RSL Accuracy

When checking RSSI/RSL against the predicted link values ensure appropriate allowances are made for Tx power-setting accuracy, path-loss calculation accuracy, and RSSI/RSL measurement accuracy.

– For a worst-case the overall accuracy is the sum of the individual accuracy limits, which for a link would be ±4 dB of the predicted value (±2 dB for transmit, ±2 dB for receive, 0 to 35°C), aside from the path-loss calculation accuracy, which should be within limits of ±3 dB.

– Typically, where the measured RSSI/RSL is more than 4 dB lower than the expected receive level you should check the path survey results, path calculations and antenna alignment.

When checking RSSI/RSL ensure the measurement is made under normal, unfaded and interference-free path conditions.

– A discrepancy of 20 dB or greater between the measured and calculated RSSI/ RSLs suggests an antenna is aligned on a side lobe, or there is a polarization mismatch.

4.2.8.3 Aligning the Antenna

Antenna alignment involves adjusting the direction of each antenna until the received signal strength reaches its maximum level at each end of the link.Fine adjustment for azimuth (horizontal angle) and elevation (vertical angle) is built into each antenna mount.Adjustment procedures will be provided with each antenna.If the horizontal adjuster does not provide suf-ficient range to locate the main beam, the antenna mounting brackets will need to be loosened and the antenna swiveled on its pole mount to locate the beam.Before doing this ensure the horizontal adjuster is set for mid-travel.Some mounts for larger antennas have a separately clamped swivel base to allow the loosened antenna to swivel on it without fear of slippage down the pole. Where such a mount is not provided a temporary swivel clamp can often be provided using a pair of pipe brackets bolted together immediately below the antenna mount.

Ensure antennas are aligned on the main beam, and not a side lobe. For guidance, refer to the sections Locating the Main Beam (see par. 4.2.8.4.1 on page 244)

and Tracking Path Error (see par. 4.2.8.4.2 on page 245). Ensure ATPC is turned off during the alignment procedure.

Note

Note

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1240/308

4.2.8.3.1 Standard Alignment Procedure

To align an antenna:

1) Loosen the azimuth adjuster on the antenna mount (horizontal angle) and adjust azimuth posi-tion for maximum signal strength.

2) Tighten the azimuth securing mechanism. Ensure signal strength does not drop as it is tight-ened.

3) Loosen the elevation adjuster (vertical angle) and adjust for maximum signal strength.

4) Tighten the elevation securing mechanism. Ensure signal strength does not drop as it is tight-ened. The terminal is now aligned and ready to carry operational traffic.

5) Record RSL and/or RSSI voltage in the commissioning log.

4.2.8.3.2 Alignment Procedure for Dual polarized Antenna

The following procedure details steps required to:

– Check and if necessary set feedhead alignment using a spirit level.

– Align the antennas at each end using just one of the feeds, H or V. (Standard co-plane antenna alignment).

– Check cross pole discrimination (XPD).

Optimize alignment of the feed-heads to achieve maximum cross polarization discrimination. This procedure assumes that the antennas used at each end of the link do comply with their

cross-polarization discrimination specification. If in doubt, refer to the antenna supplier.

Procedure:

[1] Static Feedhead Alignment

During antenna installation and before weatherproofing is installed, use a spirit level to check and set exact vertical / horizontal alignment of the feeds:

• Do not rely on antenna markings as these will not be accurate where a mount is not perfectly level.

• Set the spirit level against the flange of the feedhead. Take care that only the flange of the feed-head is measured, so that no error is introduced by any minor misalignment of the mating flex-ible waveguide flange. See Figure 164.

Note

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 241/308

Figure 164. Checking Feedhead Flange with a Spirit level

• If not exactly vertical or horizontal, adjust the feedhead skew angle (rotate the feedhead) until correct (spirit level bubble is precisely centered). For a typical feedhead check both flanges for level, using an end point half way between the level points of the two flanges should there be any discrepancy between the two.

[2] Align Antennas

Align the antennas at both ends using the standard (co-plane) alignment procedure, but using just one of the feeds, V or H. Refer to Standard Alignment Procedure (see par. 4.2.8.3.1 on page 241). When correct, proceed to step 3.

[3] Power-up both V and H links and check they are operating normally and are alarm-free. Use the Per-formance screens to check that:

• Tx power measurements are within 1 dB (typically). If not check Tx power settings.

• RSL measurements are within 2 dB. See Using RSL Data (see par. 4.2.8.2.1 on page 237) for guidance on measurement accuracy.

• Links are operating error-free.

Where there is potential for interference from other links in the same geographical area, check by turning the far end transmitter(s) off and measuring the local end RSL

on both V and H feeds.

[4] Measure the actual V and H signal discrimination from each antenna.

Note

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1242/308

• Where measured XPDs are better than 25 dB no further adjustment is needed

• Where less than 25 dB proceed to the next step.

The alignment procedures listed under steps 1 and 2 should result in a discrimination of better than 25dB. However, for best results and greater operating margins during fading, feedhead alignment should be opti-

mized using the following procedure.

[5] Optimize End-End Feedhead Alignment

This procedure corrects for any minor rotational alignment between antennas at each end.

One antenna is the reference antenna and its feed-head assembly is not adjusted during this pro-cedure.

Only check/adjust skew angles on one antenna. If both antennas are adjusted and re-adjusted there is potential for progressive misalignment to occur. Select one antenna as the reference antenna. On long hops and where fading is prevalent there is potential for the V and H plane paths to be affected differently and to therefore exhibit variable cross-polarization discrimination. This alignment procedure must be con-

ducted during periods of known, stable path conditions.

[6] Adjust the feedhead skew angle of the antenna for maximum XPD on both V and H link. If the max-imums for each are at (slightly) different angles, adjust for a mid-point.

Ensure that as you adjust the skew angle, the physical antenna alignment does not shift, which would make it necessary to repeat step 2. Check that antenna mounting bolts and azimuth and elevation adjuster locks have been correctly tightened. The maximum points may be quite sharp, rotate the feedhead slowly

to ensure they are not missed.

[7] Check the XPD on the link at the reference end of the link, which should be within 1 to 2 dB of the measurements at the adjusted end.

[8] On completion ensure feedhead bolts are correctly tightened - check that XPDs do not change during tightening.

[9] Retain feed-head adjustment data for the commissioning records.

Note

Note

Note

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 243/308

4.2.8.4 Main Beams and Side Lobes

This section describes how to locate the main beam, and typical tracking path errors.

4.2.8.4.1 Locating the Main Beam

Ensure the antennas are aligned on the main beam, and not a side lobe.

Once a measurable signal is observed, very small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main beam. For instance, a 1.2m antenna at 23 GHz typically has 0.9° of adjustment from center of main beam to the first null (0.4° to the -3 dB point). Antenna movement across the main beam will result in a rapid rise and fall of signal level. As a guide, 1 degree of beam width is equivalent to moving approximately 1.0 mm around a standard 114 mm (4.5 in.) diameter O/D pipe.

Antennas can be verified as being on main beam (as opposed to a side lobe) by comparing measured receive signal level with the calculated level.

Signal strength readings are usually measurable when at least a main beam at one end and first side lobes at the other are aligned.

The strongest signal occurs at the center of the main beam. The highest first lobe signal is typically 20 - 25 dB less than the main beam signal. When both antennas are aligned for maximum main beam signal strength, the receive signal level should be within 2 dB of the calculated level for the path. This calculated level should be included in the installation datapack for the link.

Figure 165. is an example of a head-on, conceptual view of the beam signal strength, with concentric rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main beam.

Figure 165. Indicative head-on signal pattern for a parabolic antenna

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1244/308

4.2.8.4.2 Tracking Path Error

Side lobe signal readings can be confused with main beam readings. This is particularly true for the first side lobe as the signal level at its center is greater than the signal level at the edges of the main beam, and if tracking on an incorrect elevation (or azimuth) a false impression of main beam reception can be obtained. This illustration shows an example of this with a simplified head-on view of an antenna radiation pattern, and tracking paths for three elevation settings.

Figure 166. Example Tracking Path Signals

Line AA represents the azimuth tracking path of a properly aligned antenna.The main beam is at point 2, and the first side lobes at points 1 and 3. Line BB represents the azimuth tracking path with the antenna tilted down slightly. Signal strength readings show only the first side lobe peaks, 4 and 5. In some instances the side lobe peaks are unequal due to antenna characteristics, which can lead to the larger peak being mistaken for the main beam. The correct method for locating the main beam in this case is to set the azimuth position midway between the first side lobe peaks, and then adjust the elevation for maximum signal.

Line CC represents an azimuth tracking path with the antenna tilted down further still. The first side lobe signal peaks (6 and 7) appear as one peak, leading to a mistaken interpretation of a main beam. The correct method for locating the main beam is to set the azimuth at mid peak, between 6 and 7, and then adjust elevation for maximum signal.

This first side lobe peaking is probably the most frequent cause of misalignment in both azimuth and elevation, especially so if one side lobe peaks higher than the other, as shown in Figure 167. A common error is to move the antenna left to right along line DD, or top to bottom along line EE, always ending up with the maximum signal at position 1.

Figure 167. Example Tracking Path Signals on the First Side Lobe

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 245/308

4.3 Software local copy

This section explains how to prepare the WebEML Suite and Craft Terminal environment in your PC.

– Getting Started (par. 4.3.1 on page 247)

– PC Characteristics (par. 4.3.2 on page 247)

– Local copy of the Software Package (SWP) to the PC (par. 4.3.3 on page 248)

– Local copy the WebEML to PC (par. 4.3.4 on page 250)

– Configure PC Network Card to Connect to NE (par. 4.3.5 on page 256)

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1246/308

4.3.1 Getting Started

Read the following before starting.

– The operator must be familiar with the use of personal computers in WINDOWS environment, internally from which the NE application software operates.

– WebEML Suite and MCT applications are on one CD. Software Package (SWP) is on another CD. Verify versions of the CD-ROM.

– To properly install WebEML Suite and MCT applications, a PC is required, having the characteristics specified in paragraph 4.3.2.

4.3.2 PC Characteristics

The PC to use for WebEML Suite and MCT applications must meet following characteristics:

PC Hardware Configuration:

– CPU: AMD Atlhon/Intel Celeron/Intel Pentium 4 or higher

– RAM: 1 GB

– Hard Disk space: 1.5 GB (available space for log files, JRE excluded)

– Display Resolution: 1280x800 pixel

– DVD-ROM Drive (needed for the TCO Suite)

– Ethernet Interface: Ethernet Card 10/100 Mbps

Operating Systems Supported:

– Microsoft Windows XP Professional service pack 3 or Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate service pack 2 or Windows 7

N.B. "Classic windows" setting must be choosen with Windows Vista and Windows 7.

Additional requirements:

– Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1, 7, 8, Mozilla Firefox 2, 3, 3.5

– The Administrator password is needed only for Java installation.

– When Java has been installed, the standard user can run the WebEML Suite

– Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 6 Update 14

An FTP Server must be installed on the PC of MCT user with read right & write right, and the Windows Firewall must be desactivated.

Note

Warning

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 247/308

4.3.3 Local copy of the Software Package (SWP) to the PC

Follow these steps to copy the Software Package (SWP) to the PC.

[1] Insert the SWP CD into the CD-ROM drive.

The Software Package will auto-run and open up the computer's default browser program (if auto-run fea-ture is enabled on user's PC) as soon as the CD-ROM is read by the PC. If auto-run does not start, the user must run (double-click with left mouse button on it) the aluopener.exe file, available on CD-ROM root,

in order to launch the Software Package.

This certificate is not signed by a public/trusted certification authority. The Warning Security dialog will inform the user about this problem and browser/JRE will probably recognize the signature as "not valid". This is neither an error nor a problem. If the dialog message specifies that the signature cannot be ver-ified, it means the signed applet is correct but that the signature cannot be publicly checked on the Internet. As usual, both language and graphical layout could vary with respect to browser, operating system ver-sion, operating system and browser languages and so on. To avoid further requests it is suggested to con-

firm and "always trust" the stated certificate source.

[2] Click on the Local Copy button to copy the software to your local PC.

[3] Click on the Start Copying button.

Note

Note

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1248/308

[4] Choose a directory location for the Local Copy of Software Package. Select the directory and click on OK to begin the copy process.

Warning: Special characters (like #...) cannot be used.

[5] The files will be copied from the CD to the PC and will create a directory named ECT.

[6] A successful copy message will display, when all files have been copied. Click OK.

[7] Remove the SWP CD from the CD-ROM drive.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 249/308

4.3.4 Local copy the WebEML to PC

Follow these steps to copy the WebEML software to the PC.

[1] Insert the TCO Software Suite DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.

The TCO Software Suite will auto-run and open up the computer's default browser program (if auto-run feature is enabled on user's PC) as soon as the DVD-ROM is read by the PC. If auto-run does not start, user must run (double-click with left mouse button on it) the Start.exe file, available on DVD-ROM root, in order to launch the Software Package.

This certificate is not signed by a public/trusted certification authority. The Warning Security dialog will inform the user about this problem and browser/JRE will probably recognize the signature as "not valid". This is neither an error nor a problem. If the dialog message specifies that the signature cannot be verified, it means the signed applet is correct, but that the signature cannot be publicly checked on the Internet. As usual, both language and graphical layout could vary with respect to browser, operating system version, operating system and browser languages and so on. To avoid further requests it is suggested to confirm and "always trust" the stated certificate source.

[2] The following screen opens.

[3] Double click on MSS-1c icon to perform the Local Copy of the WebEML.

Note

Note

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1250/308

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 251/308

[4] Click No.

[5] Click Yes to perform the WebEML Local Copy.

[6] Select the directory and click Open.


[7] The copy is now in progress.

[8] Wait until the following message will appear. Click OK.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1252/308

[9] Click Yes to set a link on the desktop.

[10] Double click on the WebEML icon on the desktop to start the application.

N.B. An alternative way to perform the Local Copy of the WebEML is the following:

[1] Click on the Advanced Settings button below.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 253/308

[2] Select one of the two Advanced Settings options to copy software to the PC.

• Java JRE Package Installation (par. 4.3.4.1 on page 254)

• Local Copy of WebEML (JUSM/CT) (par. 4.3.4.2 on page 254)

4.3.4.1 Java JRE Package Installation

[1] Click on the Java JRE Package Installation button to install the Sun Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 6 Update 14 version to your PC.

4.3.4.2 Local Copy of WebEML (JUSM/CT)

[1] Click on the Local Copy of WebEML (JUSM/CT) button to copy the WebEML software to your PC. Choose the directory location and click Open and then OK.


User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1254/308

[2] When the files have finished copying, this window will display. Click the OK button.

[3] Click Yes to set a link on the desktop.

[4] An icon will be created on the desktop.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 255/308

4.3.5 Configure PC Network Card to Connect to NE

This example uses a Microsoft Windows XP Professional system.

[1] Connect a CAT 5/5E cable from the PC network card to MCT connector on MSS-1c.

[2] Click on the START menu on the Windows desktop and open up the CONTROL PANEL.

[3] Open up the NETWORK CONNECTIONS. Highlight the network card as shown below.

[4] Dobule click on Properties to display the screen below and scroll down the list to highlight the Inter-net Protocol (TCP/IP) line. Click the OK button.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1256/308

[5] The DHCP server on the equipment is enabled as default. Set the PC “Obtain an IP address auto-matically”.

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 257/308

User Manual

Installation

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1258/308

5 ProvisioningThis chapter describes the first installation procedure to configure the NE.

Procedure:

[1] Set up the interconnections as shown in Figure 94. for MPT-MC and in Figure 95.-Figure 96. for MPT-HC.

[2] Verify on the PC, that the MCT application has been installed (if not, refer to paragraph 4.3.4.2 to install it)

[3] Configure the PC to “Get automatically an IP address” (because the NE is configured as DHCP Server with default IP address 192.168.30.1 and subnet mask 255.255.255.252).

[4] Connect the PC Ethernet port to the CT Port connector of the MSS-1c.

Figure 168. PC connection

[5] Launch directly the MCT by double clicking on file Mct.exe, located under the path created by the operator during the local copy and under "\\WebEML MPR TCO R4.2\9500MCT_V01.00.00\Mct".

Note: To be sure that MPT SWP version is >= MPR 2.2 and supports the MSS-1c configuration, it is recommended to launch the MCT application directly. The check is done automatically by the application and authorizes only SW download feature is case of misalignment.

User Manual

Provisioning

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 259/308

[6] Select Online and click on Next.

[7] Enter the User Name (admin) and the Password (admin) and click on Finish.

[8] If the embedded SWP is not aligned on MPR2.2 this message appears.

Only the upgrade NE functionality is available.

Note: If the software is aligned on MPR2.2, then MCT application runs as described in chapter 3 (NE management).

User Manual

Provisioning

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1260/308

[9] Configure the FTP server parameters.

Select the descriptor file in : //ECT/SWDW/R95MSS1C/1_0_0/R951C.DSC

[10] Start Software Download.

[11] Activate the Standby Software Package.

[12] MPT resets and the connection with MCT is lost.

[13] The NE is now ready.

[14] Configure by the MCT all the parameters in menu Commissioning > Configuration (refer to para-graph 3.6.1.3).

User Manual

Provisioning

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 261/308

User Manual

Provisioning

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1262/308

6 Maintenance and Trouble-clearing

6.1 Introduction

This section contains information and procedures to aid in restoring the equipment to its proper operating condition after it has been determined that a problem exists.

The following warnings and cautions apply while operating, performance testing, troubleshooting, or repairing the 9500 MPR-E series radios.

Short circuits in low-voltage, low-impedance dc circuits can cause severe arcing that may result in burns or eye injury. Remove rings,

watches, and other metal jewelry while working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

Units with the electrostatic-sensitive (ESS) symbol contain ESS devices. Store these units in an antistatic container when not in use, and anyone handling a unit should observe antistatic precautions.

Refer to the Special Precautions pages in the front of the instruction book for detailed handling information.

Ensure that all antennas are properly aligned and waveguide is in good physical condition.

Before performing procedures that might in any way affect transmission, it is recommended that the person performing the procedure

understand the Rules and Regulations pertaining to the equipment and be properly authorized to operate the equipment.

Note

Note

User Manual

Maintenance and Trouble-clearing

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 263/308

6.2 Maintenance Philosophy

This section provides information and procedures for equipment maintenance down to the Card level. Card repair is not covered in this manual.

The use of maintenance procedures in this section may result from failure of a periodic check, an alarm indication, or unacceptable performance.

6.3 Personal Computer (PC)/Laptop

Connect the RJ45 Interface cable between Craft Terminal connector on the Core-E Card and the PC.

6.4 Troubleshooting

This section provides guidance on:

– Before Going to Site Checklist

– Troubleshooting Basics

– Troubleshooting Path Problems

– Troubleshooting Configuration Problems

– Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems

– Troubleshooting TMN Problems

6.4.1 Before Going to Site Checklist

Where possible, before going to site obtain the following information:

– Does the fault require immediate attention?

– Determine who is the best-placed person to attend the fault.

– Confirm the nature and severity of the reported fault, its location, 9500 MPR-E type, frequency band, high/low end ODU, capacity modulation and configuration (nonprotected, protected, diversity). Ask:

• Is just one 9500 MPR-E link affected, or a number of links in the same geographical area?

• Is the path down completely or is traffic passing but with a BER alarm?

• Is only one or a number of tributaries affected?

• Could the fault be in the equipment connected to 9500 MPR-E, rather than in 9500 MPR-E? Are there alarms on other, connected equipment?

• Is it a hard or intermittent fault?

• Do alarms confirm which end of an alarmed link is faulty?

– Could the weather (rain, ice, high wind, temperature) be a factor in the reported fault?

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1264/308

If the fault suggests a rain fade or other weather related fade condition and it matches the prevailing weather conditions, do

not take any action until the weather abates.

– Does link history suggest any fault trends?

• Does the fault history for the link indicate a likely cause?

• Is the 9500 MPR-E link newly installed?

• Has there been any recent work done on the link?

– Ensure that you have with you:

• Appropriate spares. Where an equipment failure is suspected, these should include replace-ment MSS-1c and ODU. If an ODU is suspected then local/national climbing safety require-ments must be adhered to.

• A laptop PC loaded with Craft Terminal, and an Ethernet cable. If an Ethernet connection is to be used, you need the IP address and also the addresses for any remote sites to be accessed.

• If login security has been enabled, you need the ‘engineer’ password for the local and also any remote sites to be accessed.

• Any special test equipment that may be needed, such as a BER tester.

• Toolkit.

• Key(s) for access to the site.

6.4.2 PC Troubleshooting

In case of the NE is not displayed in the NETO screen, the MCT has to be launched directly through Mct.exe located under the path created by the operator during the local copy and under \\WebEML MPR TCO R4.2\9500MCT_V01.00.00\Mct.

6.4.3 Troubleshooting Basics

This section provides general guidance on 9500 MPR-E troubleshooting:

– Check front-panel LED indications. These provide summary alarm indications, which can help narrow down the location and type of failure. Refer to Operation section for details.

• Where a Status LED on a plug-in is off (unlit), but power to the MS is confirmed by LEDs on other plug-ins, check the seating of the affected plug-in.

– Check the MCT Screen. When logging to the equipment with Craft Terminal, the opening screen is the Main Screen. Use the information provided in menu Alarms and in menu Events to check for severity and problem type. Refer to Table 25., Table 26. and Table 27. for probable cause and recommended action.

Note

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 265/308

Table 25.

Equipment Alarm Description Configuration 1 + 0Alarm Severity

Most Probable Cause

Action

MSS-1c Card Fail Major MSS-1c card fail Replace the MSS-1c

SFP missing alarm Major The SFP optional plug-in is provi-sioned, but not present

Install the plug-in in the SFP slot

SFP Tx fault (for optical only)

Major Failure in the opti-cal transmitter

Replace the SFP

LOS on GigabitETH Interface

Major Loss of Ethernet is detected

Check link partner and cable between link partner and ETH connector

MSS-1c(E1 section)

LOS on PDH Tributary

Major No E1 input signal detected on any one or more of 10 lines

Check E1 source and/or cable

AIS on PDH Tribu-tary (RX)

Major AIS detected by the receive circuits on one or more E1 lines, indicating upstream failure

Check for upstream E1 source for errors

AIS on PDH Tribu-tary (TX)

Major AIS detected on one or more E1 lines at input to PDH 10xE1

Check E1 source

Loss of CESoETH Frame

Major Packets are not being received by the emulation cir-cuits

Check/Trouble-shoot far end alarms

Fans Unit Card Fail Major Fan failed Replace fan unit

MSS-1c and Fans Alarm Matrix

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1266/308

Table 26. MPT-HC Alarm Matrix

Equipment Alarm Description Config-uration/Alarm

Most Probable Cause Action

1+0

MPT-HC Card Fail Major MPT-HC failed Replace MPT-HC

Loss of Radio Frame

Major Far end problems, RF path problems, or local circuit fail-ures have caused BER to increase to the point that frames are being lost

1. Check/troubleshoot far end alarms 2. Replace alarmed MPT-HC

Demod Function Fail Major Internal receive circuit failure Replace MPT-HC

High BER Major Bit Error Rate threshold (10E-4) exceeded

1. Verify RF path is clear, antenna is aligned, and no existing weather- related problems 2. Verify RSL is above RCV threshold. If not – check upstream transmitter output/troubleshoot transmitter

Early Warning Minor 10E-9 BER detected No action is required at this time. Monitor receive signal for increased degrading

Link Identifier Mismatch

Major Link identifier number provi-sioned is different from link identifier number provi-sioned at other end of hop

Set numbers at both ends of hop to match

MPT Loop Communication alarm

Minor Communication problem between the local MPT and the remote MPT for all the functionalities requiring a communication loop (ATPC, ACM, Pre-distorsion)

Check the radio hop

Sync Degraded signal

Minor This alarm can raise if the addressed Radio interface has been configured as pri-mary/secondary synchroni-zation source. It is active if the frequency of the clock recovered from radio Rx sig-nal is mistuned

Check the radio hop

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 267/308

TCA on Radio Hop Major Alarm threshold exceeded on standby MPT-HC after switching from main to standby

UAT on Radio Hop Major 10 consecutive SES (unavailable time period) detected on standby MPT-HC after switching from admin to standby



1+0

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1268/308

Table 27. MPT-MC Alarm Matrix



1+0

MPT-MC Card Fail Major MPT-MC failed Replace MPT-MC

Loss of Radio Frame

Major Far end problems, RF path problems, or local circuit fail-ures have caused BER to increase to the point that frames are being lost

1. Check/troubleshoot far end alarms 2. Replace alarmed MPT-MC

Demod Function Fail

Major Internal receive circuit failure

Replace MPT-MC

High BER Major Bit Error Rate threshold (10E-4) exceeded

1. Verify RF path is clear, antenna is aligned, and no existing weather- related problems 2. Verify RSL is above RCV threshold. If not – check upstream transmitter output/troubleshoot transmitter

Early Warning Minor 10E-9 BER detected No action is required at this time. Monitor receive signal for increased degrading

Link Identifier Mismatch

Major Link identifier number provi-sioned is different from link identifier number provi-sioned at other end of hop

Set numbers at both ends of hop to match

MPT Loop Commu-nication alarm

Minor Communication problem between the local MPT and the remote MPT for all the functionalities requiring a communication loop (ATPC, ACM, Pre-distorsion)

Check the radio hop

Sync Degraded signal

Minor This alarm can raise if the addressed Radio interface has been configured as pri-mary/secondary synchroni-zation source. It is active if the frequency of the clock recovered from radio Rx sig-nal is mistuned

Check the radio hop

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 269/308

EPS – Equipment Protection Switching

LOS – Loss of Signal

RPS – Radio Protection Switching

RCV – Receiver

TCA – Threshold Crossing Alarm

UAT – Un-Available Time

– Check the basics first.

• For example, if multiple alarms are present, and these include power supply voltage or hard-ware alarms, always check their cause before looking at resultant down-stream path failure or path warning (signal) alarms.

• Similarly, if a path-related failure is indicated (no hardware or software alarms), investigate the path. Go to the Craft Terminal History screen (15 minute view) to check supporting data, such as low RSL and incidence of intermittent pre-failure BER alarms, which if present are evidence of a path-related failure.

– Check if symptoms match the alarm. Alarms reflect the alarm state, but in exceptional circumstances an alarm may be raised because of a failure to communicate correctly with the alarm source, or a failure in alarm management processing. Always check to see if symptoms match the alarm, using LED indications and the Craft Terminal.

– Check if recent work may be a cause. Recent work at the site may be a cause or contributing factor. Check for a configuration change, software upgrade, power recycling (reboot), or other site work:

• Many hardware alarms are only initiated as a loss-of-communications alarm during a reboot, software upgrade, or reconfiguration. By not being able to communicate with the MSS-1c, their settings cannot be loaded. The fault may be at the hardware device (most likely), or commu-nications to it.

– MSS before an ODU. If there is doubt about whether a fault is in the MSS or ODU, always replace the MSS first; it is quicker and easier.

TCA on Radio Hop Major Alarm threshold exceeded on standby MPT-MC after switching from main to standby

UAT on Radio Hop Major 10 consecutive SES (unavailable time period) detected on standby MPT-MC after switching from admin to standby



1+0

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1270/308

6.4.4 Troubleshooting with MSS-1c electrical or optical connection

In case of electrical connection with MPT (PFoE), there must be NO optical SFP plugged in MPT cage port (even if no fiber connected).

In case of moving from optical to electrical connection with MPT, the MSS-1c has to be switched off/on AFTER having unplugged the optical SFP on MPT port.

In case of moving from electrical to optical connection with MPT, the MSS-1c has to be switched off/on AFTER having plug the optical SFP on MPT port.

6.4.5 Troubleshooting Path Problems

A path-related problem, with the exception of interference, is characterized by traffic being similarly affected in both directions. Generally, if you are experiencing only a one-way problem, it is not a path problem.

A path extends from ODU antenna port to ODU antenna port.

– Normally a path problem is signalled by a reduced RSL, and depending on its severity, a high BER.

– Only in worst case situations, such as an antenna knocked out of alignment, will a path fail completely, and stay that way.

– For weather-related problems, such as rain or ducting, the path problem will disappear as the weather returns to normal.

6.4.5.1 Path Problems on a Commissioned Link

A path problem on an existing link, one that has been operating satisfactorily may be caused by:

– Weather-related path degradation

If BER alarms are fleeting/not permanent and RSL returns to its normal, commissioned level after the alarm is cleared, rain, diffraction, or multipath fading is indicated. Rain fade is the likely cause of fade for links 13 GHz and higher. Diffraction and multipath/ducting for links 11 GHz and lower. If these alarms are persistent, there could be a problem with the link design or original installation.

– Changed antenna alignment or antenna feed problem

If RSLs do not return to commissioned levels after a period of exceptionally strong winds, suspect antenna alignment. Also, check the antenna for physical damage, such as may occur with ice-fall. For a remote-mounted ODU, check its antenna feeder.

– New path obstruction

Where all other parameters check as normal, and the path has potential for it to be obstructed by construction works, view/survey the path for possible new obstructions.

Note

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 271/308

– Interference from other signal sources

Interference usually affects traffic in just one direction. Unlike other path problems, RSL is not affected. If suspected, check for new link installations at, or in the same geographical area, as the affected site. Ultimately, a spectrum analyzer may have to be used to confirm interference, which is not an easy task given the need to connect directly to the antenna port, after removing the ODU.

6.4.5.2 Path Problems on a New Link

For a new link, potential problems can extend to also include:

– Incorrect antenna alignment

One or both antennas incorrectly aligned. Refer to Installation alignment procedure on CD.

– Mismatching antenna polarizations

Given a typical polarization discrimination of 30 dB, for most links it is not possible to capture a signal to begin the antenna alignment process.

– Incorrect path calculations

If the RSLs are too low or too high, antenna alignment is correct, and Tx power settings are correct, check the path calculations used to determine the link performance. A good calculation match is +/- 2 dB. Disagreements in excess of 3 dB should be investigated.

– Reflections

Reflection (path cancellation) problems may not have been picked up at the path planning stage, par-ticularly if the survey was a simple line-of-sight. If suspected, resurvey the path.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1272/308

6.4.6 Troubleshooting Configuration Problems

Configuration problems should only occur during the setup of a new link, or reconfiguration of an existing link. The more common problems may be broadly categorized as:

– Incorrect circuit connections

No alarms are activated for incorrect circuit connections. An incorrect assignment means the expected end-to-end circuit connectivity will not happen. Re-check circuit assignments for all nodes carrying the lost circuit(s).Take extra care when configuring ring circuits.

– Incorrect ID naming and commissioning

All traffic-carrying circuits must have a unique flow ID for the cross-connect capability to operate.

– Incorrect/incompatible trib settings

Trib line interface settings incorrect, or line levels incompatible. While no alarm activates for an incor-rect setting, its effect may result in line levels being too low (LOS alarm), or too high, resulting in a high BER.

6.4.7 Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems

This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting problems related to the four Ethernet ports on the MSS-1c.

The most common Ethernet problems are network and connectivity related and therefore always check the following first:

– for User and NMS ports, verify link partner capability, provisioning, and connection

– for Radio ports, verify the cabling between MPT and MSS-1c

In order for the green Link LED to light:

1) Cable must be connected to Ethernet port

2) Ethernet port must be enabled (provisioned Enabled). Applicable for User and NMS ports

3) Speed and mode must be provisioned the same as the link partner.

The yellow LED opposite the green on the connector indicates activity only. The flashing yellow LED is not an indicator of signal type or quality.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 273/308

6.4.8 Troubleshooting TMN Problems

This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting TMN problems related to NMS Ethernet ports 1 and 2 on the MSS-1c.

The most common TMN problems are network related and first alert is normally observed by improper operation at the SNMP master. Always check the following first:

– Verify master is properly registered in NE to receive traps.

– Verify SNMP version matches system requirements

– Verify correct community string and privileges

– Verify proper network routing.

Refer to Table 28. for detail TMN network troubleshooting.

Table 28. TMN Network Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

Unusually slow communication in radio network

1. Normal network management traffic is saturating the communi-cations channel.

1. There may be too many radios being managed within a single region. Split the radio network management into different regions and backhaul the traffic for each region through separate channels.

2. Polling radios for PM data or missed alarms too rapidly

2. Poll the radios more slowly.

3. Multiple remote software downloads in process

3. Download to fewer radios at a time.

4. IP traffic other than network management traffic being routed through radio network

4. Configure external routers to allow only network management related traffic through the Man-agement network of the radios. Dynamic route updates (OSPF) may attempt to reroute high speed traffic through the TMN network if a high speed ink fails.

Unable to operate controls using SNMP

To perform control operations, the Manager must be registered as a craft device.

Register the Manager as a craft device. Manager registration type can be changed as needed to type ‘ct’ to allow control operation and then be changed back to ‘nml’ for normal operation.

Can Read SNMP objects but can-not Write to SNMP objects

1. Incorrect community string 1. Use the correct community string.

2. If the TMN Interface is config-ured for SNMPv2, the write com-munity string is probably wrong.

2. Use the correct write commu-nity string.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1274/308

No traps being received from NE 1. Manager not registered in NE to receive traps

1. Register Manager with NE.

2. Communication failure in net-work

2. Check network connectivity. Check redundant network paths and routing. Traceroute (tracert) is useful for locating path or rout-ing faults.

Unable to communicate with the NE through the radio network (unable to ‘ping’ the NE).

Possible communication path failure or routing failure within the radio network.

Use traceroute (tracert) to help locate for communication path or routing problems.

Can ‘ping’ the TMN Interface but cannot communicate with the NE using SNMP, or can only see a few SNMP objects in the NE.

If using SNMPv2, using the wrong community string.

Verify community string or user-name/passphrase.

Can “ping” the TMN interface, but cannot open the MCT

Another MCT session is already open on another machine

Close the other MCT session

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 275/308

6.5 Failed equipment removal and replacement

Never install, change or remove an unit without first connecting to the shelf with an ESD grounding cable. Failure to do so may

cause ESD damage to the cards.

6.5.1 MSS-1c removal and replacement

Turn off the power supply, disconnect all the cables and connect them to the spare MSS-1c and turn on the power supply.

6.5.2 MPT-HC removal and replacement

Disconnect the cables and the co-box from the MPT-HC to be replaced and connect them to the spare MPT-HC.

Reconfigure the MPT by using the WebEML (menu Commissioning > Configuration) or if a backup file is available, restore the MPT configuration by the WebEML (menu Commissioning > Configuration > Backup/Restore).

Connect the WebEML to the CT port of MSS-1c and configure the PC to “Get automatically an IP address” (because the NE is configured as DHCP Server with default IP address 192.168.30.1 and sub-net mask 255.255.255.252).

6.5.3 MPT-MC removal and replacement

Disconnect the cables and connect them to the spare MPT-MC.

Reconfigure the MPT by using the WebEML (menu Commissioning > Configuration) or if a backup file is available, restore the MPT configuration by the WebEML (menu Commissioning > Configuration > Backup/Restore).

Connect the WebEML to the CT port of MSS-1c and configure the PC to “Get automatically an IP address” (because the NE is configured as DHCP Server with default IP address 192.168.30.1 and sub-net mask 255.255.255.252).

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1276/308

6.6 Cleaning

Do not use acid, alcohol, or brushes to clean the equipment because damage to the silkscreen labeling and antistatic coating can

result. Cleaning should be confined to the removal of dust and dirt using a damp cloth.

Cleaning should normally be confined to the removal of dust and dirt using a soft bristled (natural fiber) brush and a low velocity blower (such as a vacuum cleaner with a plastic blower nozzle). Do not use acid or synthetic bristled brushes to clean cards that contain electrostatic-sensitive components.

Note

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 277/308

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1278/308

7 Line–up and CommissioningThis chapter details all phases necessary for the equipment line–up and commissioning.

Subject On page

Introduction 280

General 280

Safety–EMC–EMF–ESD norms and Cautions to avoid equipment damage 281

Conventions 281

Summary of the commissioning phases 282

Commissioning of STATION A – phase 1 (Turn up) 284

Commissioning of STATION B – phase 1 (Turn up) 285

Fine antenna alignment and preliminary checks – Stations A & B 285

End of commissioning phase 1 (Turn up) in STATION A 287

Commissioning station A – phase 2 (acceptance test) 288

Commissioning station B – Phase 2 (acceptance Test) 299

Final operations 299

Annex A: fine antenna alignment 299

User Manual

Line–up and Commissioning

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 279/308

7.1 Introduction

7.1.1 General

This chapter details all phases necessary for the equipment line–up, commissioning, and acceptance, providing the user with the information needed to connect, power on, and perform a minimum turn–up of a radio link comprising two MSS-1c Network Elements.

N.B. If the radio link consists of one MSS-1c in one station and one MSS-4/MSS-8 in the other sta-tion, for the commissioning of the station with the MSS-4/MSS-8 refer to the relevant User Man-ual.

It is assumed that, at both premises (Station A and Station B), the mechanical installation and cabling of the INDOOR and OUTDOOR units is completed, the antennas are installed and pre–positioned, and the MSS-1c–ODU cable(s) has/have been connected to the MSS-1c.

Any information needed to complete the above mentioned operations are out of the scope of this chapter.

For this purpose refer to the Installation section.

All the cables and measurement kits as described in Table 29. below are supposed to be available.

Table 29. Test and commissioning instruments

INSTRUMENT QTY CHARACTERISTICS

Laptop computer running the NE software

1 MCT

PDH Analyzer – Pattern Generator 1 E1 traffic

Link Service kit cable (for MPT antenna alignment)

1

In alternative, for Ethernet Datachannel functionality tests:

– 1 PC + 1 Ethernet cable (for ping function)

or

– 2 PCs (for ping function)or

– 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers

Optional

Multi–meter 1 Voltmeter AC and DC – Loop tester

TRS 1 Test Result Sheet, available as separate document

The Alcatel–Lucent Software package V2.2.0 must have already been installed in the PC used as the Craft Terminal (CT) and the same software version must be already present as commit version in the two Net-work Elements.

N.B. In the PC must be installed the FTP server.

Before proceeding with line–up and commissioning, ensure that you have the equipment and accessories required for that purpose.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1280/308

7.1.2 Safety–EMC–EMF–ESD norms and cautions to avoid equipment damage

If not yet done, read whole Chapter 1 on page 19: it describes the operations and/or precautions to be observed to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases, and to guarantee equipment safety. Read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipment.

7.1.3 Conventions

To simplify the description of actions, the following symbols are in use:

Symbol used Meaning

Manual action

Check/Verify

CT⇒ On Craft Terminal Select

⇒ Select a Menu item

→ Sub Menu item

The commissioning operations described in this document are for a radio link between a Station A and a Station B.

If the network includes supervision, station A is the one located between the supervisory station and sta-tion B (see figure below). Installation and commissioning begin at station A.

MSS MSS

Figure 169. Relative positions of stations A and B

WARNING: at the beginning of this procedure, the “local IP address” and “Ethernet IP address” of both the NE 9500 MPR-E stations, are still set to default value (as delivered from Alcatel–Lucent factory). For this reason, their physical connection to the TMN network must be done after having changed such addresses to correct values.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 281/308

7.1.4 Summary of the line–up, commissioning, and acceptance phases

The commissioning procedure is summarized as follows:

[1] Turn up (phase 1)

1) Visual inspection and NE configuration.

a) Station A, roughly point the antenna towards station B (if not done in the Hardware Instal-lation procedure)

b) Commission station A (phase 1)

c) Commission station B (phase 1)

2) Fine antenna alignment and preliminary checks – Stations A & B

a) Station B, fine align the antenna towards station A, and preliminary checks

b) Station A, fine align the antenna towards station B, and preliminary checks

[2] Site acceptance tests (phase 2)

3) Station A, perform all the commissioning checks and tests – Report the results in the TRS.MSS-1c

4) Station B, perform all the commissioning checks and tests – Report the results in the TRS.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1282/308

7.1.5 How to access the remote NE

Configuration example of NE in STATION A

- NE Local IP address: 172.168.60.1- NE NMS1 IP address: 192.168.50.2

Configuration example of NE in STATION B

- NE Local IP address: 172.168.70.1

The PC, as shown in Figure, is connected to the equipment in Station A and with the MCT we have to access also the equipment in Station B.

How to configure the PC

– Assign to the PC an IP address in the same sub-net as the NMS1 interface.– Configure a static route with this command: "route add 0.0.0.0 mask 0.0.0.0 192.168.50.2" (IP

address of the NMS1 working as Gateway).– Or in the IP configuration of the Ethernet Interface set the Default Gateway to 192.168.50.2 (NE A

NMS1 IP address).

How to configure the MPT in Station A

– Enable the "TMN RF Access" in menu Configuration > Networking > Network interfaces.

How to configure the MPT in Station B

– Enable the "TMN RF Access" in menu Configuration > Networking > Network interfaces.– Add the Static route "Default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Link on radio side" in menu Configuration > Net-

working > Static Routing.– Or Add a static route to Network 192.168.50.0 255.255.255.0 Link on radio side.– Or Add a static route to Host 192.168.50.x (PC IP address) 255.255.255.255 Link on radio side.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 283/308

7.2 Commissioning of STATION A – phase 1 (Turn up)

– Where necessary, switch OFF the power supply before disconnecting the earth connection,

– Do not connect instruments directly to the MSS-1c/ODU cable connector since the con-nector carries DC voltage used to supply the ODU.

– Do not connect the IF cable between MSS-1c and ODU while the MSS-1c is powered up.

7.2.1 Turn–on preliminary operations

ALL THESE OPERATIONS ARE PERFORMED WITH THE POWER OFF

The antenna of station A (or B) is pointed towards station B (or A) the best as possible (use compass if necessary).

The hardware configuration of the equipment corresponds to the expected one.

Make visual inspection for units’ installation and cabling:

• The MSS-1c subrack allocation according to the station lay–out

• The MSS-1c subrack and units ground connections

• The power supply voltage is present with the correct polarity at the MSS-1c power supply input

• Tributaries are cabled on the station DDF

• The MSS-1c–ODU cables ground kit connections

• The ODU(s) ground connections (In the case of a non–integrated antenna, the antenna and the ODU(s) must be ground connected)

• The MSS-1c(s) / ODU(s) cables are connected to MSS-1c(s) and ODU(s)

• The ODU(s) cables connectors waterproofing.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1284/308

7.2.2 Powering up the MSS-1c(s) with ODU(s) connected

This operation has the following scopes:

– verify the SWP present both in MCT and NE

– make the Central Frequency and Shifter values of ODUs be acquired by MSS-1c (so that they are retained in the NE’s data base).

Proceed as follows:

a) Switch on the MSS-1c by using the circuit breakers

b) Connect locally the MCT to the MSS-1c of the local station and perform the NE login.

1) Make a local connection through the Ethernet cable, between the Ethernet port of the PC and the NMS interface on the MSS-1c

2) Power on the PC and wait for its start–up

3) Start–up the MCT and wait for the welcome screen

4) Insert the “local IP address”

5) Start supervision on the local Network Element

c) Configure the NE as explained in the Provisioning chapter.

7.3 Commissioning of STATION B – phase 1 (Turn up)

– To commission Station B, perform (at Station B premises) the same operations carried on at Station A–Phase 1.

For near future tests, establish, on the DDF of Station B, hardware loops on every tributary.

7.4 Fine antenna alignment and preliminary checks – Stations A & B

7.4.1 Fine antenna alignment

When Station A and Station B are fully configured and operational, and assuming that the antenna insta-tion A (or B) has been previously correctly pointed toward the antenna in station B (or A), you should receive some field from station B (or A).

Note 1: Verify that the ATPC is disabled.

Now, proceed to a fine tuning of the antenna to improve as much as possible the received level, in both-Station A (at Station A premises) and Station B (at Station B premises). To perform the fine antenna align-ment refer to Annex A: fine antenna alignment on page 299.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 285/308

7.4.2 Preliminary checks

At first on Station A (at Station A premises), then on Station B (at Station B premises), log in the NE and-perform following checks by MCT:

Subject On page

Verify ODU(s) alarm status 286

Transmitter power output check 286

Received power measurement 286

7.4.2.1 Verify MPT alarm status

Purpose: Verify no abnormal communication alarm between MSS-1c and MPT

Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software

Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c.

MCT ⇒ Alarms menu

Verify in the alarms list for that there is no internal communication failure

Verify in the alarms list that there is no TX failure

7.4.2.2 Transmitter power output check

Purpose: Verify via MCT the ODU(s) transmitted power output.



MCT ⇒ Monitoring → Power Measurement menu

In Configuration → Radio menu, verify that ATPC is ”Disabled” (If required, change the ATPC status to disable in the ATPC field)

Verify that Tx Power value complies with the suitable value already set (If required, change the Tx Power in the Configuration → Radio menu)

7.4.2.3 Received power measurement

Purpose: Verify via MCT the received power to detect any interference



MCT ⇒ Monitoring → Power Measurement menu

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1286/308

→ In the Refresh period (sec), write the suitable measurement poling time (default = 5 sec)

Pressing “Start” will prompt a graphic monitoring view of the transmitted and received levels.

Verify in the hop calculation (plant documentation) that the calculated received level has been reached.

Verify that there are no interferences.

7.5 End of commissioning phase 1 (Turn up) in STATION A

– In Station A, proceed to a final fine alignment of the antenna toward the antenna of Station B. To per-form the fine antenna alignment, refer to Annex A: fine antenna alignment on page 299.

– In Station A, proceed to the remote NE (station B) acquisition (by opening a second NETO session) in order to verify in both the stations:

Received level complies with hop calculation

No alarm showing (except unloaded tributaries)

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 287/308

7.6 Commissioning station A – phase 2 (acceptance test)

Commissioning phase 2 is a site acceptance test procedure made up of the required tests to ensure that the equipment is fully operational.

This phase describes first of all the way to check and to change (if necessary) via the Craft Terminal menu the different configuration parameters already set, for most of them, during the Provisioning followed by various tests.

Most of the tests and checks results have to be recorded in the TRS (Test Results Sheet). Operator will be invited to do so each time it is required by the following sentence: “Report… in the TRS.”

N.B. The lettered titles in following table [ a ) , b ) , etc.] correspond to the page’s heading titles of the TRS document.

Test On page Report in TRS

a) Installation and cabling visual inspection 290

Indoor System installation and cabling visual inspection

Outdoor System installation and cabling visual inspection

b) System configuration 290

Check Software Release

Check/set Mode (Presettings or Adaptive modulation), Channel spacing, Modulation

Check/set Tx/Rx Spacing, Transmission and Reception frequencies

Check/set Link Identifier configuration (optional)

Check/set the QoS criteria to be used

Check/set Tx power (ATPC Off ) or Tx range and Rx threshold (ATPC On)

Check/set the synchronization

Tx and Rx power measurement (with MCT)

Line-side loopback functionality (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)

c) E1 traffic 292

Balanced or Unbalanced impedance

E1 point to point loop test

d) Ethernet traffic 293

Check/set Traffic Ethernet port parameters

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1288/308

Test On page Report in TRS

e) NE configuration 293

Check/set the local NE IP address

Check/set the Ethernet access (OS) configuration

Check/set IP static routing configuration

f) Data/Time settings 294

g) Hop E1 stability test 294

h) Ethernet Traffic stability test 295

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 289/308

7.6.1 Installation and cabling visual inspection

7.6.1.1 Indoor System installation and cabling visual inspection

See and fill the indoor inspection check list in the TRS.

7.6.1.2 Outdoor System installation and cabling visual inspection

See and fill the indoor inspection check list in the TRS.

7.6.2 System configuration

Purpose: Verify via MCT the configuration of the Local Station.


Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c

7.6.2.1 Check Software Release

MCT ⇒ Menu Commissioning → Software Download → Tab-panel Software Package Versions

Check the Software release.

Report in the TRS.

7.6.2.2 Check/set Mode (Presettings or Adaptive modulation), Channel spacing, Modulation

MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Radio

If required, change any paramater.

Report the parameters in the TRS.

7.6.2.3 Check/set Tx/Rx Spacing, Transmission and Reception frequencies


Report the Shifter, Tx and the Rx frequencies in the TRS.

If required, change the Tx frequency. Rx Freq. will be automatically adjusted.

7.6.2.4 Check/set Link Identifier configuration (optional)

MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Advanced Radio

If it is necessary, change any parameter.

Report the Link Identifier status (Enabled or Disabled), and, if Enabled, the “Expected” and“Sent” values.

7.6.2.5 Check/set the QoS criteria to be used

Select the suitable QoS criteria to be used: Disabled/802.1p/DiffServ.

Report in the TRS.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1290/308

7.6.2.6 Check/set Tx power (ATPC Off ) or Tx range and Rx threshold (ATPC On)


ATPC “Disabled”Report the ATPC “Disabled” status, Tx nominal Power and Tx Power setting into theTRS.

ATPC “Enabled”Report the ATPC “Enabled” status, ATPC Range and ATPC RX Threshold setting in the TRS.

If required, change ATPC Mode or ATPC Range or ATPC Rx Threshold then → Apply

7.6.2.7 Check/set the synchronization

Provisioning Tool → Network Synchronization Clock configuration

Check/set all the parameters regarding the synchronization.

Report in the TRS.

7.6.2.8 Tx and Rx power measurement (with MCT)

Purpose: Verify via MCT the Transmitted (PTx) and Received (PRx) power.


Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c

MCT ⇒ Menu Monitoring → Power Measurements

→ In the Refresh Period (sec) write the suitable measurement polling time then press → Start

Pressing “Start” will prompt a graphic monitoring view of the transmitted and received levels.

Report the Current Tx Local End (PTx) and the current Rx Local End (PRx) in the TRS.

7.6.2.9 Line-side loopback functionality (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)

Purpose: Verify via MCT the Line-side loopback functionality (only in the local NE)

Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software and E1 Data Analyzer

Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c Connect Pattern Generator/Error Detector analyzer on one Tributary Access (At the Station DDF)

– A delay up to 10 seconds may be observed for each activation/deactivation.– Ensure that the local tributary access is active (unframed and configured).

MCT ⇒ Menu Troubleshooting → Select Line Side → Press Activate

Error Detector showing no errors.Loopback showing in the Troubleshooting view.

To remove the loopback press Deactivate.

Report about the Loopback functionality in the TRS.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 291/308

7.6.3 E1 traffic

7.6.3.1 Balanced or Unbalanced impedance

Provisioning Tool → PDH ports and local IWF Cross Connection configuration

Set the impedance for the E1 streams.

Report the Impedance in the TRS.

7.6.3.2 E1 point to point loop test

Purpose: Verify the point to point Tributaries quality Verify the tributaries alarm status monitoring functionality

Required Instruments: PC with MCT software and E1 Data Analyzer

Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c. Configure all the E1 in TDM2TDM wit the cross-connections to the Radio port. Connect Pattern Generator/Error Detector on Tributary Access (At the Station DDF)

MCT ⇒ Menu Alarms

Report the result in the TRS.

Figure 170. Test bench for tributary functionality check with MPT-HC/MPT-MC

N.B. With the MPT-HC the Outdoor Power Extractor must be installed.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1292/308

[1] Point to point Tributaries quality test

Assuming that all the tributaries have been enabled and configured (Unframed status and configu-ration) via MCT in both stations and that every tributary is looped at the DDF in the remote station:

♦ Perform one minute of BER test on each E1 tributary

Verify that the analyzer detects no error.

Verify the tributary alarm status:

MCT ⇒ Menu AlarmsVerify that while the data analyzer is connected, the“AlarmLossSignal” on the relevant tributary is off.

[2] Check of the tributaries alarm status monitoring functionality

To create an alarmed condition, remove the “Tributary loopback” at the Remote station.

In Menu Alarms, verify that while the data analyzer is connected, the “AlarmLossSignal”on the relevant tributary goes on.

Restore the “Tributary loopback” at the Remote station, and verify that the “AlarmLossSignal” on there-levant tributary goes off.

7.6.4 Ethernet traffic

7.6.4.1 Check/set Traffic Ethernet port parameters

Provisioning Tool → Ethernet Port configuration

Check and, if it is necessary, change the parameters.

Report in the TRS.

7.6.5 NE configuration

7.6.5.1 Check/set the local NE IP address

MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Networking → Network Interfaces

Report the local IP Address in the TRS.

7.6.5.2 Check/set the Ethernet access (OS) configuration

MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Networking → Network Interfaces → NMS IP parameters

Report the IP Address and IP Mask in the TRS.

7.6.5.3 Check/set IP static routing configuration

MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Networking → Static Routing

Report the IP Address, IP Mask and Default gateway IP Address or interface type into theTRS.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 293/308

7.6.6 Data/Time settings

MCT ⇒ Menu bar ⇒ Configuration ⇒ NE Time

Enter the time settings.

Report in the TRS.

7.6.7 Hop E1 stability test

N.B.: this test is in alternative to that described in point d) (performed on one Ethernet port)

Purpose: Verify the Hop stability

Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software and E1 Data Analyzer

Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1cConnect Data analyzer on one Tributary Access (At the Station DDF)

– The Hop stability test is performed during two consecutive hours, one time, on one Tributary, in real-working condition whatever the protection configuration.

– The two-hour stability test must be free of error in normal propagation conditions (out of fading period)

♦ Via the MCT, let only one active tributary in both station

♦ In the remote Station, place a hardware loop on the relevant tributary access (at the station DDF).

♦ In the local station, connect the E1 Data Analyzer on the relevant tributary. Check that the “Tributary Alarm Loss” disappears.

Verify in both stations that none alarm is active.

Report the two-hour error-free of error Hop Stability Test result in the TRS.

Figure 171. Test bench for tributary functionality check with MPT-HC/MPT-MC


User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1294/308

7.6.8 Ethernet Traffic stability test

Purpose: Verify the quality of point to point Ethernet Data Channels

Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software and, in alternative: • 1 additional PC and 1 Ethernet cable • 2 additional PCs • 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers

Procedure:

a) Connect MCT to MSS-1c of local station

b) Perform the connectivity test on user port #1, according to the chosen test bench:

• Test bench with 1 additional PC and 1 Ethernet cable: see point [1]

• Test bench with 2 additional PCs: see point [2]

• Test bench with 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers: see point [3]

c) Perform the connectivity test on user ports #2 , #3 and #4 (if required)If required in plant documentation, repeat the connectivity test [step b) above] for the other three-ports, with obvious test bench changes on remote station.

Report about the connectivity test of Ethernet Data Channels in the TRS.

d) Perform the hop stability test

1) Set up the test bench with 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers (point [3]). On both stations, connect the Data analyzer on Ethernet port #1.

2) Start this test after the “learning” of the MAC address.

3) Configure the Pattern generator in order to generate continuos traffic and set the data ratehalf to the radio capacity and with packet size of 1518 bytes.

4) Perform the stability test for 2 hours.

5) Compare the number of Tx and Rx Frames on the Pattern A: the number of frames must be equal in normal propagation conditions (out of fading period).

Report the two-hour error-free Ethernet Stability Test result in the TRS.

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 295/308

[1] Test bench with 1 additional PC and 1 Ethernet cable

a) ConnectionsOn local station, connect the additional PC on Ethernet port #1 (testing port).On remote station, through the Ethernet cable, connect the NMS Ethernet port to the Ethernet port #1 (port to be tested)

b) Set “Enable”, “Flow Control disable”, and “Capability Advertised” for ports to testPerform the following operations on each data port (Ethernet ports #1 to #4) of both sta-tions:• State ⇒ Enabled• Auto Negotiation Status ⇒ Forced• Flow Control ⇒ Disabled • Speed ⇒ “1000 Mb/s”• Duplex mode ⇒ Full

c) Perform the connectivity test on port #1

1) at local station, on PC connected to Ethernet port #1 (N.B.), ping the remote station (using) the NE’s “Ethernet Configuration IP address”) with 50 packets with 1000 byte length.N.B.: the “PC’s IP address” and the NE’s “Ethernet Configuration IP address” must belong to the same subnetwork.Windows OS details, if necessary:– Start → Programs → Accessories → Command Prompt– ping <space> –l <space> 1000 <space> –n <space> 50 <space> IP Address

<enter>

2) the RIGHT LED on the corresponding front panel blinks with cable inserted and traffic runningAt least 45 packets must pass without any packet loss from the 5th packet

Figure 172. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 1 additional PC and 1 Ethernet cable


User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1296/308

[2] Test bench with 2 additional PCs

a) ConnectionsOn local station, connect the additional PC on Ethernet port #1 (testing port)On remote station, connect the additional PC on Ethernet port #1 (port to be tested)

b) Set “Enable”, “Flow Control disable”, and “Capability Advertised” for ports to test MCT perform the following operations on each data port (Ethernet ports #1 to #4) of

both stations:• State ⇒ Enabled• Auto Negotiation Status ⇒ Forced• Flow Control ⇒ Disabled • Speed ⇒ “1000 Mb/s”• Duplex mode ⇒ Full


1) at local station, on PC connected to Ethernet port #1, ping the far–end PC with 50 packets with 1000 byte length.Windows OS details, if necessary:– Start → Programs → Accessories → Command Prompt– ping <space> –l <space> 1000 <space> –n <space> 50 <space> IP Address

<enter>

2) the RIGHT LED on the corresponding front panel blinks with cable inserted and traffic running.At least 45 packets must pass without any packet loss from the 5th packet.

Figure 173. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 2 additional PCs


User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 297/308

[3] Test bench with 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers

a) ConnectionsOn local station, connect the Data analyzer on Ethernet port #1 (testing port)On remote station, connect the Data analyzer on Ethernet port #1 (port to be tested)

b) Set “Enable”, “Flow Control disable”, and “Capability Advertised” for ports to test MCT perform the following operations on each data port (Ethernet ports #1 to #4) of

both stations:• State ⇒ Enabled• Auto Negotiation Status ⇒ Forced• Flow Control ⇒ Disabled • Speed ⇒ “1000 Mb/s”• Duplex mode ⇒ Full


1) Start this test after the “learning” of the MAC address.2) Configure Pattern Generator A in order to generate 50 packets with 1000 byte length,

and set the data rate half of the radio capacity.3) the RIGHT LED on the corresponding front panel blinks with cable inserted and traffic

running.At least 45 packets must pass without any packet loss from the 5th packet.

Figure 174. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers


User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1298/308

7.7 Commissioning station B – Phase 2 (acceptance Test)

Repeat in Station B all the tests performed in Station A except the Hop Stability Test that has to be run only one time for the full hop.

Fill a second Test Result Sheet for Station B

END OF COMMISSIONING ACCEPTANCE TEST

7.8 Final operations

Complete the commissioning of each NE, creating the NE operator profiles and saving its data.

7.9 Annex A: fine antenna alignment

Safety requirements for workers on antenna pole, and microwave radiations (EMF norms)

SAFETY RULESWhen operating on the antenna pole, strictly follow cautions. In particular, if ODU is powered on from MSS, do not stand on the antenna axis and beaware of the compliance boundaries.

Antenna pre–pointing should have been done during equipment hardware installation.

This annex explains how to carry out the antenna fine alignment.

To monitor the received level during alignment in the local station:

– use the ODU Rx power monitoring in addition to a voltmeter,

– or, after having logged in the NE, use the Craft Terminal received power measurement facility

Alignment procedure using the ODU Rx power monitoring

a) the radio link must be up and the ATPC disabled

b) in general, fine alignment should be done only on one station of the radio link

c) connect a voltmeter to the ODU (by using the Light Serfice kit cable for the MPT)

d) proceed with Vertical alignment, then with Horizontal alignment

e) in configurations with two antennas, repeat the procedure for the second antenna.

Procedures for Vertical and Horizontal alignment depend on the type of integrated polemounting employed.

Note

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 299/308

User Manual


9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1300/308

ABBREVIATIONS

ABBREVIATION MEANING

ACM Adaptive Coding Modulation

ADM Add Drop Multiplexer

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

ANSI American National Standards Institute

AP Access Point

APS Automatic Protection Switching

APT Active Problem Table

AS Alarm Surveillance

ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control

AVC Attribute Value Change

BBE Background Block Error

BER Bit Error Rate

BR & SW Bridge & Switch

Browser Application which allows to browse all RM-MIB objects

CCLNP ConnectionLess Network Protocol

CD Current Data

CDCC Data Communication Channel

CD-ROM Compact Disc Read Only Memory

CES Circuit Emulation Service

CI Communication Infrastructure

CLA Common Loss Alarm

CRU Clock Reference Unit

User Manual

Abbreviations

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 301/308

CTP Connection Termination Point

CT Craft Terminal

DCI Drop & Continue Interconnection

DCN Data Communications Network

DS Degraded Signal

EC Equipment Controller

ECC Embedded Communication Channels

EFC Ethernet Flow Control

EFD Event Forwarding Discriminator

EML Element Management Layer

EML domain A set of NEs that are maintained by the same EML-OS.

EOW Engineering Order Wire

EPG Eps Protection Group

EPS Equipment Protection Switching

EPU Eps Protection Unit

EM-OS Element Manager-Operation System

EMS Event Management Services

ES Errored Second

ET Elementary Topology. It is a grouping of some nodes connected according to specific rules. A typical ET is a ring.

ETH ETHernet

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EW Early Warning

FCM Fixed Coding Modulation

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FD Frequency Diversity

FE Fast Ethernet

FLS Frame Loss Second

FM FM Fault Management

Gbit/s Gigabits per second


User Manual

Abbreviations

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1302/308

GFP Generic Frame Protocol

GNE Gateway Network Element

HBER High Bit Error Ratio

HD History Data

HET Hetero frequency

HS Hitless Switch

HSB Hot Stand-By

HTML HyperText Markup Language

ICP Internal Communication Problem

IDU InDoor Unit

IM Information Model

IP Internet Protocol

IWF Inter-Working Function

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IM Information Manager

JUSM Java User Service Manager

Kbit/s Kilobits per second

LAG Link Aggregation Group

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on D-channel

LBER Low Bit Error Ratio

LCT Local Craft Terminal

MCT Microwave Craft Terminal

LDPC Low Density Parity Check

LOF Loss Of Frame

LOS Loss Of Signal

MAC Medium Access Control

MAU Medium Attachment Unit

Mbit/s Megabits per seconds

MEF Metro Ethernet Forum


User Manual

Abbreviations

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 303/308

MIB Management Information Base

MPR Microwave Packet Radio

MPT-HC Microwave Packet Transport - High Capacity

MSS Microwave Service Switch

MSS-1c Microwave Service Switch Compact

NE Network Element

NEC Network Element Clock

NMS Network Management system

Node It is the view of the NE at NML level

NSA Not Service Affecting

NTP NetworkTime Protocol

OC ODU Controller

OCN Object Creation Notification

ODN Object deletion Notification

ODU OutDoor Unit

OFS Out of Frame Seconds

OH OverHead

OS Operation System

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PM Performance Monitoring

PNU Packet Node Unit

Port Physical Interface of a Node. A port can be SDH or PDH.

PI Physical Interface

PPI PDH Physical Interface

PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence

PSU Power Supply Unit

PTU Packet Transport Unit

QoS Quality of Service

RACS Received Automatic Control Status

RAI Remote Alarm Indication


User Manual

Abbreviations

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1304/308

RDI Remote Defect Indication

RI Remote Inventory

RPG Rps Protection Group

RPU Rps Protection Unit

RPS Radio Protection Switching

RPPI Radio Plesyochronous Physical Interface

RTP Real Time Protocol

SA Site Aggregator

SCG Service Channel Protection Group

SCN State Change Notification

SCU Service Channel Protection Unit

SD Signal Degrade

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SES Severely Errored Second

SF Signal Failure

SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable

SONET Synchronous Optical Network

SPDH Super PDH

STM Synchronous Transport Module

TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm

TD Threshold Data

TDF Total Discarded Frames

TMN Telecommunications Management Network

TPS Tx Protection Switching

TPG Tps Protection Group

TPU Tps Protection Unit

TRCF Total Received Correct Frames

TRCO Total Received Correct Octets

TRSEF Total Received Service Errored Frames

TRsp Tx Rx spacing


User Manual

Abbreviations

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 305/308

TRU Top Rack Unit

TS Time Slot

TTF Total Transmitted Frames

TTO Total Transmitted Octets

TTP Trail Termination Point

UAS UnAvailable Second

UAT UnAvailable Time

USM User Service Manager

UPA Unavailable path alarm

URU Underlying Resource Unavailable

WTR Wait Time to Restore


User Manual

Abbreviations

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1306/308

CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK

The meaning of this section is to collect customer feedback about this handbook.

Scope of this activity is the improvement and innovation of customer documentation through the under-standing of customer needs.

Your comments are welcome.

Please send your comment also if you appreciate the handbook.

You can send them to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center.

They will be addressed to the team in charge of the relevant manual.

The following form supplies an example only of useful info, as a guide of the type of expected feedback.

It is possible fill part of the form, add other data and so on.

How to send feedback:

• copying the example form, filling it and sending it to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assis-tance Center. In this case handbook data are already available at the page bottom.

• using the same form available as a file in the relevant documentation CD-ROM, saving, filling and sending it by e-mail to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center.

• creating a dedicated form on paper or file and sending it to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center.

We’ll take your suggestion in account.

We reserve to modify consequently the handbook according to the corretness and congruence of the sug-gestion and requests.

User Manual

Customer Documentation Feedback

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 307/308

308

CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK

Handbook DataHandbook title, release,version:Handbook type:Handbook part number and edition:

General Feedback EvaluationSUBJECT 5(max) 4 3 2 1 (min)

Total evaluationInfo quantityInfo qualityInfo structureConsulting facilityLayout

Chapters Feedback EvaluationHANDBOOK PARTS 5(max) 4 3 2 1(min)

PREFACECHAPTER 1CHAPTER 2CHAPTER 3CHAPTER 4CHAPTER 5CHAPTER 6CHAPTER 7Your Comments (stricltly necessary when value is less than 3):

Suggestion for ImprovementWhich subject to deepen:

How to deepen:

Subject to eliminate or reduce

Other comments/suggestions

Errors Identified

Reader InfoName:Company:Address:E-mail:Phone:

User Manual

Customer Documentation Feedback

9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0

3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1308/308

3DB 18782 AAAA Edition 1

w

All rights reserved.Passing on and copying of this document,

use and communication of its contents is not permittedwithout written authorization from Alcatel -Lucent.

ww.alcatel-lucent.com

Technology

Mpr mss 1 c_user_manual (Alcatel Lucent)